CM2B25 PDF

Air Cylinder
Series CM2
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
Series Variations
Standard variations Bore CJ1
Series Action Rod Cushion Basic Built-in
size Page
With Clean Copper/
Air-hydro (mm)
One-touch fitting rod boot series Fluorine-free
CJP
Standard Single Rubber
Series CM2 rod

128 CJ2
Double Air
acting
Double Rubber CM2
146
rod Air
Single rod
CG1
Single
(Spring return/ Rubber 156
acting Spring extend) MB
Rubber
Non-rotating Rod Single
171 MB1
Series CM2K Double
rod Air
acting
Double Rubber 20 CA2
176
rod Air 25 CS1
Single rod
Single 32
(Spring return/ Rubber
acting Spring extend)
40
181
CS2
Direct Mount
Rubber
Series CM2R Double Single
186
acting rod
Air
Direct Mount,
Non-rotating Rod
Double Single
Series CM2RK acting rod Rubber 193
Low Friction
,,
Series CM2Q Use the new Smooth Cylinder Series CM2Y to realize
both-direction low friction and low-speed operation. 198
(Refer to Best Pneumatics No. 3.)
Centralized Piping
Series CM2 쏔P Double Single
acting Rubber 199
rod
20
25
With End Lock 32

Rubber
Series CBM2 Double Single (Lock in head 40
acting rod rod only) 204
Air
D-쏔
Low-speed cylinder
-X쏔
Series CM2X Refer to Best Individual
Pneumatics No. 3. -X쏔
Technical
data
125
Combinations of Standard Products and Made to Order Specifications
Series CM2 Series CM2
,,
Use the new Smooth Cylinder Series CM2Y to realize
both-direction low friction and low-speed operation.
: Standard Series CM2 CM2K CM2R CM2RK CM2쏔P CM2쏔Q CBM2 CM2X
: Made to Order specifications (Standard) (Not-rotating) (Direct mount) (Direct mount, Non-rotating) (Centralized Piping) (Low Friction) (With end Lock) Low-speed cylinder Note 2)
Action/
: Special product (Contact SMC for details.) Double acting Single acting Double acting Single acting Double acting Double acting Double acting Double acting Double acting Double acting
Type
: Not available Single rod Double rod Single rod Single rod Double rod Single rod Single rod Single rod Single rod Single rod Single rod Single rod
Cushion
Rubber Air Rubber Air Rubber Rubber Air Rubber Air Rubber Rubber Air Rubber Rubber Rubber Rubber Air Rubber CJ1
Applicable
Symbol Specification bore size ø20 to ø40 ø20 to ø40
CJP
Standard Standard
D Built-in magnet CJ2
CM2쏔F With one-touch fittings
CM2쏔-쏔 KJ With rod boot CM2
CM2쏔H Air-hydro type ø20 to ø40
10-, 11- Clean series Note 3) CG1
20- Copper and Fluorine-free
CM2쏔 RV Water resistant Note 3) MB
CM2쏔X Low-speed cylinder
MB1
XB6 Heat-resistant cylinder (–10 to 150 C) Note 1)
XB7 Cold-resistant cylinder Note 1) CA2
XB9 Low-speed cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s)
XB12 External stainless steel cylinder CS1
XB13 Low-speed cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s)
XC3 Special port position CS2
Note 3)
XC4 With heavy duty scraper
XC5 Heat-resistant cylinder (–10 to 110 C) Note 1)
XC6 Made of stainless steel
Note 3) Note 3)
XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type
Note 4) Note 4)
XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type
XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type
XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type ø20 to ø40
XC12 Tandem cylinder
XC13 Auto switch rail mounting
Note 4)
XC20 Head cover axial port
XC22 Fluororubber seal
XC25 No fixed orifice of connecting port
Double clevis pins made of stainless
XC27 steel (Stainles steel 304)
XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin
Note 3)
XC35 With coil scraper
XC38 Vacuum specification (Rod through-hole)
XC52 Mounting nut with set screw
Note 1) The products with an auto switch are not compatible.
Note 2) Refer to Best Pneumatics No. 3 for Low-speed cylinders.
Note 3) Available only for locking at head end.
Note 4) Available only for locking on rod side.
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
126 127
Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod
Series CM2
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order
Mounting style Cylinder stroke (mm)
B Basic style T Head side trunnion style (Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 129.)
L Axial foot style E Clevis integrated style Bore size Cushion
F Rod side flange style BZ Boss-cut basic style
20 20 mm Nil Rubber bumper
G Head side flange style Boss-cut rod side
FZ 25 25 mm A Air cushion
C Single clevis style flange style
32 32 mm ∗ Air-hydro cylinder: Rubber bumber only
D Double clevis style Boss-cut rod side
UZ 40 40 mm
U Rod side trunnion style trunnion style
Made to Order
(Refer to page 129 for details.)
CM2 L 40 150 A
With auto switch CDM2 L 40 150 A M9BW
Rod boot Number of
With auto switch Type auto switches
(Built-in magnet) Nil None
Nil Pneumatic Nil 2 pcs.
J Nylon tarpaulin
H Air-hydro Port thread type S 1 pc.
K Heat resistant tarpaulin
Nil Rc n “n” pcs.
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model TN NPT Auto switch
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto switch is G TF Nil Without auto switch
required, there is no need to enter the symbol for the Built-in one-touch fitting F ∗ For the applicable auto switch model, refer to
auto switch. the table below.
∗ Air-hydro type: Rc only
(Example) CDM2F32-100
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Lead wire length (m)
Indicator
Electrical Wiring Auto switch Pre-wired

light
Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 None connector Applicable load

entry (Output) DC AC model
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9N
5V, 12V IC circuit
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9P
M9B
Solid state switch
2-wire 12V —
Connector H7C
Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5V, 12V G39A ∗∗ IC circuit
Relay,
Yes
conduit 2-wire 24V 12V — K39A ∗∗ —

PLC
3-wire (NPN) M9NW
Diagnostic indication 5V,12V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PW
(2-color indication)
Grommet M9BW
2-wire 12V —
Water resistant (2-color indication) H7BA
With diagnostic output (2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5V, 12V H7NF IC circuit
3-wire —
— 5V A96 IC circuit —
Yes
(NPN equivalent)
Grommet
100V A93 —
No Yes No Yes No
100V or less A90 IC circuit

Reed switch
100V, 200V B54 ∗∗ Relay,

PLC
200V or less B64 ∗∗ —
Connector
12V — C73C
2-wire 24V
24V or less C80C IC circuit
Terminal — A33A ∗∗ PLC
conduit A34A ∗∗
Yes
100V, 200V — Relay,

DIN terminal A44A ∗∗
PLC
Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Grommet — — B59W
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ·······Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “ ” are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m ······· M (Example) M9NWM ∗ D-A9쏔V/M9쏔V/M9쏔WV and D-M9쏔A(V)L cannot be mounted.
3 m ······· L (Example) M9NWL ∗ Do not indicate suffix “N” for no lead wire on D-A3쏔A/A44A/G39A/K39A models.
5 m ······· Z (Example) M9NWZ ∗∗ D-A3쏔A/A44A/G39A/K39A/B54/B64 cannot be mounted on bore sizes ø20 and
None ······· N (Example) H7CN ø25 cylinder with air cushion.
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 218 for details.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1328 and 1329.
∗ D-A9쏔/M9쏔/M9쏔W auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (However, auto switch mounting brackets are assembled when being shipped.)
128
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CM2
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Type Pneumatic
Action Double acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature CJ1
Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)
Stroke length tolerance CJP
Clevis integrated Piston speed Rubber bumper: 50 to 750 mm/s, Air cushion: 50 to 1000 mm/s
JIS Symbol Cushion Rubber bumper, Air cushion
CJ2
Double acting, Rubber bumper 0.27 J 0.4 J 0.65 J 1.2 J
Single rod Allowable CM2
kinetic energy Air cushion 0.54 J 0.78 J 1.27 J 2.35 J
(Effective cushion length (mm)) (11.0) (11.0) (11.0) (11.8)
With air cushion
CG1
MB
Standard Stroke
Bore size Standard stroke (1) Maximum stroke
MB1
(mm) (mm) (mm)
Made to Order Specifications CA2
(For details, refer to pages 1373 to 1498.) 20 1000
Symbol Specifications 25 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150 1500 CS1
32 200, 250, 300 2000
—XA쏔 Change of rod end shape
—XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (150 ) 40 2000 CS2
—XB7 Cold resistant cylinder Note 1) Other intermediate strokes can be manufactured upon receipt of order.
—XB9 Low speed cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s) Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible.
—XB12 External stainless steel cylinder
(Spacers are not used.)
Note 2) When exceeding 300 strokes, the allowable maximum stroke length is
—XB13 Low speed cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s) determined by the stroke selection table (front matter 28).
—XC3 Special port location
—XC4 With heavy duty scraper
—XC5 Heat resistant cylinder (110 )
Boss-cut style
—XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel
—XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type Boss for the head side cover bracket
is eliminated and the total length of
—XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type
cylinder is shortened.
—XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type
—XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type
—XC12 Tandem cylinder
—XC13 Auto switch mounting rail style
—XC20 Head cover axial port
Comparison of the Full Length Dimension
—XC22 Fluororubber seals
(Versus standard type) (mm)
—XC25 No fixed orifice of connecting port
—XC27 Double clevis pin and double knuckle pin made of stainless steel
—XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin
—XC35 With coil scraper
—XC52 Mounting nut with set screw
Mounting style
쐽 Boss-cut basic style (BZ) 쐽 Boss-cut flange style (FZ)
쐽 Boss-cut trunnion style (UZ)
Rod Boot Material
Maximum ambient
Symbol Rod boot material temperature
J Nylon tarpaulin Mounting Bracket/Part No.
K Heat resistant tarpaulin Min. Bore size (mm)
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot Mounting bracket order Description (for min. order)
20 25 32 40
itself.
Axial foot ∗ 2 CM-L020B CM-L032B CM-L040B 2 foot, 1 mounting nut
Refer to pages 214 to 218 for cylinders with Flange 1 CM-F020B CM-F032B CM-F040B 1 flange D-쏔
auto switches. Single clevis∗ ∗ 1 CM-C020B CM-C032B CM-C040B 1 single clevis, 3 liners
Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting
∗∗
Double clevis ∗ ∗ ∗
1 CM-D020B CM-D032B CM-D040B
1 double clevis, 3 liners, -X쏔
Proper auto switch mounting position (with pins) 1 clevis pins, 2 retaining rings
Individual
(detection at stroke end) and mounting height Trunnion (with nuts) 1 CM-T020B CM-T032B CM-T040B 1 trunnion, 1 trunnion nut
-X쏔
Operating range ∗ Order 2 foot brackets for each cylinder unit.
Switch mounting bracket: Part no. ∗∗ 3 Liners are attached with a clevis bracket for adjusting the mounting angle. Technical
∗ ∗ ∗ Clevis pins and retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are attached. data
129
Series CM2
Mounting Style and Accessory
Accessory Standard equipment Option
Mounting Rod end Clevis Single Double Clevis
(3) (4)
Rod
(6)
Pivot Pivot
(7)
Precautions
knuckle knuckle
nut nut pin joint bracket boot bracket bracket
Mounting joint pin Be sure to read before handling.
Basic style Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for
Axial foot style Safety Instructions and pages 3 to
Rod side flange style
11 for Actuator and Auto Switch
Head side flange style
(1)
Precautions.
Clevis integrated style
(1)
Single clevis style
Double clevis style
(3) (1) (5)
Operating Precautions
(2)
Rod side trunnion style
Head side trunnion style (2)
Warning
Boss-cut basic style 1. Do not rotate the cover.
Boss-cut flange style If a cover is rotated when installing a cylinder
Boss-cut trunnion style or screwing a fitting into the port, it is likely to
Note 1) Mounting nuts are not attached for clevis integrated style, single clevis, and double damage the junction part with cover.
clevis styles. 2. Do not operate with the cushion
Note 2) Trunnion nuts are attached for rod side trunnion and head side trunnion styles.
Note 3) Knuckle pin and snap ring (cotter pin for ø40) are shipped together with double clevis
needle in a fully closed condition.
and double knuckle joint. Using it in the fully closed state will cause the
Note 4) Pin and snap ring are shipped together with clevis bracket. cushion seal to be damaged. When adjusting
Note 5) Clevis pins come with retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40). the cushion needle, use the “Hexagon
Note 6) Pivot brackets do not come with pins and retaining rings. wrench key: nominal size 1.5”.
Note 7) Pivot bracket pins come with retaining rings. 3. Do not open the cushion needle
wide excessively.
Mounting Bracket, Accessory/Material, Surface Treatment If the cushion needle were set to be
Segment Component parts Material Surface treatment completely wide (more than 3 turns from fully
Foot Rolled steel plate Nickel plated closed), it would be equivalent to the cylinder
Flange Rolled steel plate Nickel plated with no cushion, thus making the impacts
Mounting Single clevis Rolled steel Nickel plated extremely high. Do not use it in such a way.
bracket Besides, using with fully open could give
Double clevis Rolled steel Nickel plated
Trunnion Cast iron Electroless nickel plated damage to the piston or cover.
Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
Mounting nut Carbon steel Nickel plated Caution
Trunnion nut Carbon steel Nickel plated 1. Not able to disassemble.
Clevis bracket Rolled steel plate Nickel plated Cover and cylinder tube are connected to
Clevis pin Carbon steel (None) each other by caulking method, thus making
Rolled steel it impossible to disassemble. Therefore,
Single knuckle joint Electroless nickel plated internal parts of a cylinder other than rod
Accessory ø40: Sulfur easy chipping steel
seal are not replaceable.
Rolled steel Electroless nickel plated
Double knuckle joint
ø40: Cast iron Metallic bronze color painted for ø40 2. Use caution to the popping of a
Double clevis pin Carbon steel (None) retaining ring.
Double knuckle joint pin Carbon steel (None) When replacing rod seals and removing and
Pivot bracket Rolled steel plate Nickel plated mounting a snap ring, use a proper tool
Pivot bracket pin Carbon steel (None) (retaining ring plier: tool for installing a type
C retaining ring). Even if a proper tool is
used, it is likely to inflict damage to a human
Mass (kg) body or peripheral equipment, as a retaining
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 ring may be flown out of the tip of a plier. Be
Basic style 0.14 0.21 0.28 0.56 much careful with the popping of a retaining
Axial foot style 0.29 0.37 0.44 0.83 ring. Besides, be certain that a retaining ring
Flange style 0.20 0.30 0.37 0.68 is placed firmly into the groove of rod cover
before supplying air at the time of
Clevis integrated style 0.12 0.19 0.27 0.52
installment.
Single clevis style 0.18 0.25 0.32 0.65
Basic mass
Double clevis style 0.19 0.27 0.33 0.69 3. Do not touch the cylinder during
Trunnion style 0.18 0.28 0.34 0.66 operation.
Boss-cut basic style 0.13 0.19 0.26 0.53 Use caution when handling a cylinder, which
Boss-cut flange style 0.19 0.28 0.35 0.65 is running at a high speed and a high
Boss-cut trunnion style 0.17 0.26 0.32 0.63 frequency, because the surface of a cylinder
Additional mass per each 50 mm of stroke 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.13 tube could get so hot enough as to cause
Clevis bracket (With pin)
you get burned.
0.07 0.07 0.14 0.14
Single knuckle joint 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.23 4. Do not use an air cylinder as an air-
Option
bracket
Double knuckle joint (With pin) 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.20 hydro cylinder.
Pivot bracket 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 If it uses turbine oil in place of fluids for
Pivot bracket pin 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.03 cylinder, it may result in oil leakage.
Calculation: (Example) CM2L32-100 5. Combine the rod end section, so
• Basic mass················0.44 (Foot style, ø32)
• Additional mass·········0.08/50 stroke
that a rod boot might not be twisted.
If a rod boot is installed with being twisted
• Cylinder stroke···········100 stroke
0.44 + 0.08 x 100/50 = 0.60 kg
when installing a cylinder, it will cause a rod
boot to fail during operation.
130
Air-hydro Built-in One-touch Fittings
CM2H Mounting style Bore size Stroke Rod boot CM2 Mounting style Bore size F Stroke
Air-hydro Built-in One-touch fittings
A low hydraulic pressure cylinder used at a pressures of 1.0 MPa
or below. This type has the One-touch fitting integrated in a cylinder, which
Through the concurrent use of a CC series air-hydro unit, it is enables to reduce the piping labor and installing space
possible to operate at a constant or low speeds or to effect an dramatically.
intermediate stop, just like a hydraulic unit, while using
pneumatic equipment such as a valve. CJ1
CJP
CJ2
Specifications Specifications
Type Air-hydro Action Double acting, Single rod CM2
Fluid Turbine oil Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
Action Double acting single rod Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
CG1
Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa MB
Cushion Rubber bumper
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.18 MPa Piping One-touch fittings MB1
Piston speed 15 to 300 mm/s Piston speed 50 to 750 mm/s
Ambient and fluid temperature +5 to +60°C Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style, CA2
Head side flange style, Single clevis style, Double clevis
+1.4 Mounting style, Rod side trunnion style, Head side trunnion style,
Stroke length tolerance mm
0 Clevis integrated style, Boss-cut style CS1
Cushion Rubber bumper (Standard equipment) ∗ Auto switch can be mounted.
Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style, CS2
Mounting
Head side flange style, Single clevis style, Double clevis Applicable Tubing O.D./I.D.
style, Rod side trunnion style, Head side trunnion style,
Clevis integrated style, Boss-cut style Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
∗ Auto switch can be mounted. Dimensions are the same as standard type Applicable tubing
of series CM2. 6/4 6/4 6/4 8/6
O.D./I.D. (mm)
Can be used for either nylon, soft nylon or

Applicable tubing material
polyurethane tubing.
앫 For construction, refer to page 134.
앫 Since the dimensions of mounting style is the same as pages 136 to 143, refer to
those pages. Caution
1. One-touch fitting cannot be replaced.
• One-touch fitting is press-fit into the cover, thus cannot be replaced.
2. Refer to Fittings and Tubing Precautions (Best Pneumatics No. 6) for
handling one-touch fittings.

앫 For dimensions of each mounting style, refer to pages 136 to 143.
앫 For other specifications, refer to page 129.
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
131
Series CM2
Clean Series Copper/Fluorine-free
10-CM2 Mounting style Bore size Stroke 20-CM2 Mounting style Bore size Stroke
Clean Series (With relief port) Copper/fluorine-free
The type which is applicable for using inside the clean room The type which prevents copper based ions from generating by
graded Class 100 by making an actuator’s rod section a double changing the copper based materials into electroless nickel
seal construction and discharging by relief port directly to the plated treatment or non-copper materials in order to eliminate
outside of clean room. the effects by copper based ions or fluororesins over the color
cathode ray tube.
Action Double acting, Single rod Action Double acting, Single rod
Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40 Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Cushion Rubber bumper, Air cushion Cushion Rubber bumper Air cushion
Relief port size M5 x 0.8 Piston speed 50 to 750 mm/s 50 to 1000 mm/s
Piston speed 30 to 400 mm/s Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style,
Mounting
Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style, style, Rod side trunnion style, Head side trunnion style,
Mounting Head side flange style, Boss-cut style Clevis integrated style, Boss-cut style
∗ Auto switch can be mounted.
Construction
Construction
Standard port Relief port
ø20, ø25
Standard port
Relief port
Relief port ∗ The above shows the case of rubber
bumper.
ø32, ø40
For details, refer to the separate catalog, “Pneumatic Clean Series”.
132
Water Resistant
CDM2 Mounting style Bore size Port thread type R Stroke A H7BAL -XC6 Specifications
Bore size (mm) 20, 25, 32, 40
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet) Cushion Rubber bumper, Air cushion
Water resistant cylinder Auto switch mounting Band mounting
R NBR seals (Nitrile rubber) Made to Order Piston rod, Rod end nut made of stainless steel (-XC6)
V FKM seals (Fluororubber) ∗ Specifications other than the above are the same as the standard basic type.
CJ1
Cushion Dimensions
Nil Rubber bumper CJP
A Air cushion Water resistant 2-color
indication solid state auto switch CJ2
Made to Order
CM2
ø
ø
Ideal for use in a machine tool environment exposed to coolant mist.
Also suited for use in areas in which water splashes, such as food processing CG1
equipment or car washers.
Bore size (mm) E1 E2 ∗ NN1 NN2 ∗ MB
0 0
20 22–0.033 20–0.033 M22 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5
∗ Other dimensions are the same as double acting, single rod, standard
type. (∗: Same as the standard.)
MB1
∗
Mounting Bracket/Part No. CA2
Mounting bracket Min. Bore size (mm) Description (for min. order)
∗∗
order 20 CS1
Axial foot 2 CM-L020C 2 foot, 1 mounting nut
Caution Flange 1 CM-F020C 1 flange CS2
Rod seal and scraper is not replaceable. Trunnion (with nuts) 1 CM-T020C 1 trunnion, 1 trunnion nut
• Scraper is press-fit into the rod cover, thus cannot be replaced.
∗ ø25 to ø40: Same as the standard type
∗∗ Order 2 foot brackets for every cylinder.
Details Page 895
Low-speed Cylinder
CM2 X Mounting style Bore size Stroke Specifications

Bore size (mm) 20, 25, 32, 40
Low-speed Cylinder
Type Pneumatic
Smooth operation with a little sticking and slipping at low speed. Action Double acting, Single rod
Can start smoothly with a little ejection even after being Fluid Air
rendered for hours.
Ambient and fluid temperature
Piston Speed
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Piston speed (mm/s) 0.5 to 300
Allowable kinetic energy (J) 0.27 0.4 0.65 1.2
The dimensions are the same as the double acting, single rod type.
Refer to Best Pneumatics No. 3 for details. Refer to Best Pneumatics No. 3 for details.
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
133
Series CM2
Rubber bumper
Boss-cut style Clevis integrated style
Air-hydro
With air cushion
Built-in One-touch fittings
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
1 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 12 Clevis bushing Copper oil-impregnated sintered alloy
2A Head cover A Aluminum alloy Clear anodized ∗ 13 Piston seal NBR
2B Head cover B Aluminum alloy Clear anodized ∗∗ 14 Piston gasket NBR
2C Head cover C Aluminum alloy Clear anodized ∗∗∗ 15 Wear ring Resin
3 Cylinder tube Stainless steel 16 Mounting nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
4 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 17 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
5 Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated
6 Bushing Copper oil-impregnated sintered alloy Replacement Part: Seal
7 Seal retainer Stainless steel 쎲 With rubber bumper/With air cushion/Built-in One-touch fittings
8 Retaining ring Carbon steel Phosphate coated Part no.
No. Description Material
9 Bumper A Urethane 20 25 32 40
10 Bumper B Urethane 18 Rod seal NBR PDU-8Z PDU-10Z PDU-12LZ PDU-14LZ
11 Retaining ring Stainless steel 쎲 Air-hydro
∗ Basic style, ∗∗ Boss-cut style, ∗∗∗ Clevis integrated style 18 Rod seal NBR HDU-8 HDU-10 HDU-12L HDU-14
∗ Since the seal kit does not include a grease pack, order it separately.
Grease pack part no.: GR-S-010 (10 g)
134
Basic Style (B)
CM2B Bore size Stroke
G
Width across flats B2 H2 G 2xP 2 x NN
Width across flats B1 H1 (Rc, NPT, G) I
ø
2 x øEh8
NA
øD
CJ1
MM Effective thread length
AL NA
Width across flats KA A K F N N
2 x FL CJP
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke CJ2
CM2
Cushion needle
With rod boot With air cushion (Width across flats 1.5) CG1
8 l 8
WA WA 45°
Width across flats B3 MB
MB1
øe
JH
CA2
f N1 N1
h JW CS1
ZZ + Stroke
CS2
Boss-cut style G One-touch fitting port size øP G
Q
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 H2 I K KA MM N NA NN P S ZZ
20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20 – 00.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 1
8 62 116
25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 – 00.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 1
8 62 120
32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 – 00.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 1
8 64 122
40 24 21 22 41 14 32 – 00.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 1
4 88 154
With Rod Boot (mm)

Symbol
h l ZZ
Str
oke B3 e f
Bore size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
20 30 36 18 68 81 93 106 131 156 181 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 143 156 168 181 206 231 256
25 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 160 185 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 147 160 172 185 210 235 260
32 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 160 185 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 149 162 174 187 212 237 262
40 41 46 20 77 90 102 115 140 165 190 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 181 194 206 219 244 269 294
With Rod Boot (mm) Boss-cut Style (mm) With Air Cushion (mm) Built-in One-touch Fittings (mm)
Bore size JH JW ZZ Bore size N1 WA Bore size G P Q
20 23.5 10.5 Bore size Without With rod boot 20 17.5 13 20 8 6 21.5
25 23.5 10.5 rod boot 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 25 17.5 13 25 8 6 24.5
32 23.5 10.5 20 103 130 143 155 168 193 218 243 32 17.5 13 32 8 6 27
40 27 10.5 25 107 134 147 159 172 197 222 247 40 21.5 16 40 11 8 32.5 D-쏔
32 109 136 149 161 174 199 224 249
40 138 165 178 190 203 228 253 278 -X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
135
Series CM2
Axial Foot Style (L)
CM2L Bore size Stroke
H
A K F G 2xP
Width across flats B1 AL H2 (Rc, NPT, G) G F 2 x NN
H1 (Effective thread length 2 x FL)
Width across flats KA
øD
B
2 x øLC
LH
Width across flats B2 4 x øLD
MM Width across flats 쏔NA N
N
Y X S + Stroke X Y LX
LT
Z LS + Stroke LZ
ZZ + Stroke
With rod boot 8 l 8

Width across flats B3
øe
JH
f
h JW
ZZ + Stroke
Cushion needle
(Width across flats 1.5)
With air cushion WA WA 45°
N1 N1
Built-in One-touch fittings G One-touch fitting port size øP G

Q
(mm)
Bore size A AL B B1 B2 D F FL G H H1 H2 I K KA LC LD LH LS LT LX LZ MM N NA NN P S X Y Z ZZ
1
20 18 15.5 40 13 26 8 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 4 6.8 25 102 3.2 40 55 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 8 62 20 8 21 131
25 22 19.5 47 17 32 10 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 4 6.8 28 102 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 1 62 20 8 25 135
8
1
32 22 19.5 47 17 32 12 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 4 6.8 28 104 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 8 64 20 8 25 137
1
40 24 21 54 22 41 14 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 4 7 30 134 3.2 55 75 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 4 88 23 10 27 171
With Rod Boot (mm)

Symbol
h l Z
Str
oke B3 e f
20 30 36 19.2 68 81 93 106 131 156 181 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 48 61 73 86 111 136 161
25 32 36 19.2 72 85 97 110 135 160 185 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 52 65 77 90 115 140 165
32 32 36 19.2 72 85 97 110 135 160 185 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 52 65 77 90 115 140 165
40 41 46 21.2 77 90 102 115 140 165 190 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 54 67 79 92 117 142 167
With Rod Boot (mm) With Air Cushion (mm) Built-in One-touch Fittings (mm)
Symbol
Str
ZZ Bore size N1 WA Bore size G P Q
oke JH JW
Bore size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 20 17.5 13 20 8 6 21.5
20 158 171 183 196 221 246 271 23.5 10.5 25 17.5 13 25 8 6 24.5
25 162 175 187 200 225 250 275 23.5 10.5 32 17.5 13 32 8 6 27
32 164 177 189 202 227 252 277 23.5 10.5 40 21.5 16 40 11 8 32.5
40 198 211 223 236 261 286 311 27 10.5
136
Rod Side Flange Style (F)
CM2F Bore size Stroke
4 x øFD Width across flats B2
H2 G 2xP G
Mounting hole Width across flats B1 H1 2 x NN
(Rc, NPT, G)
C2
FY
øD
øI
B
øE
2 x øFD
Mounting
FX Width across
MM AL Width across flats 쏔NA 1.5
Effective thread CJ1
ø40 FZ flats KA K FT length 2 x FL
hole A N
ø20 to ø32 Z N CJP
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke
CJ2
CM2
With rod boot 8 l 8 Boss-cut style
CG1
MB
øe
MB1
JH
ZZ + Stroke
h
f
JW
CA2
ZZ + Stroke
Cushion needle
CS1
45°
With air cushion (Width across flats 1.5) WA WA
CS2
N1 N1
G G
Built-in One-touch fittings One-touch fitting port size øP
Q
(mm)
Bore size A AL B B1 B2 C2 D E F FL FD FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I K KA MM N NA NN P S Z ZZ
0 1
20 18 15.5 34 13 26 30 8 20 – 0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 8 62 37 116
25 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 – 00.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 1
8 62 41 120
32 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 – 00.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 1
8 64 41 122
0 1
40 24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 – 0.039 16 13.5 7 5 66 36 82 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 4 88 45 154
With Rod Boot (mm)

Symbol
h l ZZ
Str
oke B3 e f
20 30 36 20 68 81 93 106 131 156 181 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 143 156 168 181 206 231 256
25 32 36 20 72 85 97 110 135 160 185 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 147 160 172 185 210 235 260
32 32 36 20 72 85 97 110 135 160 185 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 149 162 174 187 212 237 262
40 41 46 23 77 90 102 115 140 165 190 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 181 194 206 219 244 269 294
With Rod Boot (mm) Boss-cut Style (mm) With Air Cushion (mm) Built-in One-touch Fittings (mm)
Bore size JH JW ZZ Bore size N1 WA Bore size G P Q D-쏔
20 23.5 10.5 Bore size Without With rod boot 20 17.5 13 20 8 6 21.5
rod boot 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
25 23.5 10.5 25 17.5 13 25 8 6 24.5 -X쏔
32 23.5 10.5 20 103 130 143 155 168 193 218 243 32 17.5 13 32 8 6 27
25
Individual
40 27 10.5 107 134 147 159 172 197 222 247 40 21.5 16 40 11 8 32.5
-X쏔
32 109 136 149 161 174 199 224 249
40
Technical
138 165 178 190 203 228 253 278
data
137
Series CM2
Head Side Flange Style (G)
CM2G Bore size Stroke
Effective thread length 2 x FL
H2 Width across flats B2 2 x øFD
Width across flats B1 H1 2 x NN G 2xP G 4 x øFD
Mounting hole
C2
(Rc, NPT, G) Mounting hole
FY
øD
øI
B
øE
Width MM AL Width across flats 쏔NA N FX

across flats KA A K F N FZ ø40
H S + Stroke FT
Z + Stroke ø20 to ø32
ZZ + Stroke
8 l 8
With rod boot
øe
JH
Cushion needle
f
h JW
ZZ + Stroke
45°
WA WA
With air cushion
N1 N1
G One-touch fitting port size øP G

Q
(mm)
Bore size A AL B B1 B2 C2 D E F FL FD FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I
0
20 18 15.5 34 13 26 30 8 20 – 0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 41 5 8 28
0
25 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 – 0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 33.5
0
32 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 – 0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 37.5
0
40 24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 – 0.039 16 13.5 7 5 66 36 82 11 50 8 10 46.5
(mm) With Air Cushion (mm) Built-in One-touch Fittings (mm)

Bore size K KA MM N NA NN P S Z ZZ Bore size N1 WA Bore size G P Q
1
20 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 8 62 107 116 20 17.5 13 20 8 6 21.5
1
25 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 8 62 111 120 25 17.5 13 25 8 6 24.5
1
32 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 8 64 113 122 32 17.5 13 32 8 6 27
1
40 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 4 88 143 154 40 21.5 16 40 11 8 32.5
With Rod Boot (mm)

Symbol
h l ZZ
Str
oke B3 e f
20 30 36 18 68 81 93 106 131 156 181 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 143 156 168 181 206 231 256
25 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 160 185 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 147 160 172 185 210 235 260
32 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 160 185 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 149 162 174 187 212 237 262
40 41 46 20 77 90 102 115 140 165 190 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 181 194 206 219 244 269 294
With Rod Boot (mm)

Bore size JH JW
20 23.5 10.5
25 23.5 10.5
32 23.5 10.5
40 27 10.5
138
Single Clevis Style (C)
CM2C Bore size Stroke
+ 0.058
Effective thread length FL øCDH10 0
Width across flats B1 H1 NN G G

2xP
(Rc, NPT, G) øI
NA
øCI
øD
øE
CJ1
MM AL CX –– 0.1
0.2
Width across flats KA A K F N N U NA CJP

H S + Stroke L
Z + Stroke RR
ZZ + Stroke CJ2
CM2
With rod boot 8 l 8
Width across flats B3 CG1
MB
øe
JH
MB1
f
h JW CA2
ZZ + Stroke Cushion needle
(Width across flats 1.5) CS1
With air cushion WA WA 45°
CS2
N1 N1

Q
(mm)
Bore size A AL B1 CI CD CX D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN P RR S U Z ZZ
0 1
20 18 15.5 13 24 9 10 20 – 0.033 13 10.5
8 8 41 5 28 5 6 30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 8 9 62 14 133 142
0 1
25 22 19.5 17 30 9 10 10 26 – 0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 8 9 62 14 137 146
0 1
32 22 19.5 17 30 10 12 26 9 – 0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 8 9 64 14 139 148
0 1
40 24 21 22 38 10 15 14 32 – 0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 4 11 88 18 177 188
With Rod Boot (mm)

Symbol
Str
h l Z
oke B3 e f
20 30 36 18 68 81 93 106 131 156 181 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 160 173 185 198 223 248 273
25 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 160 185 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 164 177 189 202 227 252 277
32 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 160 185 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 166 179 191 204 229 254 279
40 41 46 20 77 90 102 115 140 165 190 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 204 217 229 242 267 292 317
D-쏔
Symbol
Str
oke JH JW
Bore size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 20 17.5 13 20 8 6 21.5 -X쏔
20 169 182 194 207 232 257 282 23.5 10.5 25 17.5 13 25 8 6 24.5
25 173 186 198 211 236 261 286 23.5 10.5 32 17.5 13 32 8 6 27 Individual
-X쏔
32 175 188 200 213 238 263 288 23.5 10.5 40 21.5 16 40 11 8 32.5
40 215 228 240 253 278 303 328 27 10.5 Technical
data
139
Series CM2
Double Clevis Style (D)
CM2D Bore size Stroke
+ 0.058
Effective thread length FL øCD hole H10 0
– CL
Width across flats B1 H1 NN G 2xP G Axis d9 – 0.040
0.076
(Rc, NPT, G) øI
NA
øCI
øD
øE
MM AL N U CX
Width across flats KA A K F N CZ
H S + Stroke L NA
Z + Stroke RR
ZZ + Stroke
With rod boot 8 l 8

øe
JH
f
h JW
ZZ + Stroke Cushion needle
WA WA 45°
With air cushion
N1 N1

Q
(mm)
Bore size A AL B1 CD CI CL CX CZ D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN P RR S U Z ZZ
20 18 15.5 13 9 24 25 10 19 8 20 – 00.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 1
8 9 62 14 133 142
25 22 19.5 17 9 30 25 10 19 10 26 – 00.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 1
8 9 62 14 137 146
32 22 19.5 17 9 30 25 10 19 12 26 – 00.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 1
8 9 64 14 139 148
40 24 21 22 10 38 41.2 15 30 14 32 – 00.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 1
4 11 88 18 177 188
∗ Clevis pin and snap ring (cotter pin for bore size ø40) are shipped together.
With Rod Boot (mm)
Symbol
h l Z
Str
oke B3 e f
20 30 36 18 68 81 93 106 131 156 181 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 160 173 185 198 223 248 273
25 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 160 185 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 164 177 189 202 227 252 277
32 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 160 185 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 166 179 191 204 229 254 279
40 41 46 20 77 90 102 115 140 165 190 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 204 217 229 242 267 292 317
Symbol
Str
oke JH JW
Bore size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 20 17.5 13 20 8 6 21.5
20 169 182 194 207 232 257 282 23.5 10.5 25 17.5 13 25 8 6 24.5
25 173 186 198 211 236 261 286 23.5 10.5 32 17.5 13 32 8 6 27
32 175 188 200 213 238 263 288 23.5 10.5 40 21.5 16 40 11 8 32.5
40 215 228 240 253 278 303 328 27 10.5
140
Rod Side Trunnion Style (U)
CM2U Bore size Stroke
Width across G 2xP G 2 x NN
flats B1 H1 (Rc, NPT, G)
øTD
øTY
øD
øI
øE
MM AL Width across flats 쏔NA
Effective thread length CJ1
TX
Width across flats KA A K TT 2 x FL
TZ
Z N N CJP
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke CJ2
With rod boot 8 l 8 Boss-cut style CM2
CG1
øe
MB
JH
f ZZ + Stroke MB1
h JW
ZZ + Stroke
Cushion needle
CA2
45°
(Width across flats 1.5) WA WA
With air cushion CS1
CS2
N1 N1

Q
(mm)
Bore size A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 I K KA MM N NA NN P
20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20 – 00.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 1
8
1
25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 – 00.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 8
32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 – 00.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 1
8
40 24 21 22 41 14 32 – 00.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 1
4
(mm) With Rod Boot (mm)

Symbol
Bore size S TD TT TX TY TZ Z ZZ h
Str
oke B3 e f
20 62 8 10 32 32 52 36 116 Bore size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
25 62 9 10 40 40 60 40 120 20 30 36 25 68 81 93 106 131 156 181
32 64 9 10 40 40 60 40 122 25 32 36 25 72 85 97 110 135 160 185
40 88 10 11 53 53 77 44.5 154 32 32 36 25 72 85 97 110 135 160 185
40 41 46 26 77 90 102 115 140 165 190
With Rod Boot (mm)
Symbol
Str
l Z ZZ
oke JH JW
20 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 63 76 88 101 126 151 176 143 156 168 181 206 231 256 23.5 10.5
25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 67 80 92 105 130 155 180 147 160 172 185 210 235 260 23.5 10.5
32 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 67 80 92 105 130 155 180 149 162 174 187 212 237 262 23.5 10.5
40 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 71.5 84.5 96.5 109.5 134.5 159.5 184.5 181 194 206 219 244 269 294 27 10.5
Boss-cut Style (mm) With Air Cushion (mm) Built-in One-touch Fittings (mm) D-쏔
Bore size Without
rod boot 1 to 50
With rod boot 20 17.5 13 20 8 6 21.5 -X쏔
51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 25 17.5 13 25 8 6 24.5
20 103 130 143 155 168 193 218 243 32 17.5 13 32 8 6 27 Individual
25 107 134 147 159 172 197 222 247 40 21.5 16 40 11 8 32.5 -X쏔
32 109 136 149 161 174 199 224 249 Technical
40 138 165 178 190 203 228 253 278 data
141
Series CM2
Head Side Trunnion Style (T)
CM2T Bore size Stroke
2 x NN G Width across flats B2
G 2xP
Width across flats B1 H1 (Rc, NPT, G)
øTD
øTY
øD
øI
øE
MM AL Width across flats 쏔NA TX

Width across flats KA A K F N N TZ
H S + Stroke TT
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
8 l 8
With rod boot
øe
f JH Cushion needle
h JW
ZZ + Stroke
WA WA 45°
With air cushion
N1 N1

Q
(mm)
Bore size A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 I K KA MM N NA NN P
0 1
20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20 – 0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 8
0 1
25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 – 0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 8
0 1
32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 – 0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 8
0 1
40 24 21 22 41 14 32 – 0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 4

Symbol
Bore size S TD TT TX TY TZ Z ZZ h
Str
oke B3 e f
20 62 8 10 32 32 52 108 118 Bore size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
25 62 9 10 40 40 60 112 122 20 30 36 18 68 81 93 106 131 156 181
32 64 9 10 40 40 60 114 124 25 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 160 185
40 88 10 11 53 53 77 143.5 154 32 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 160 185
40 41 46 20 77 90 102 115 140 165 190
With Rod Boot (mm)

Symbol
l Z ZZ
Str
oke JH JW
20 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 135 148 160 173 198 223 248 145 158 170 183 208 233 258 23.5 10.5
25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 139 152 164 177 202 227 252 149 162 174 187 212 237 262 23.5 10.5
32 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 141 154 166 179 204 229 254 151 164 176 189 214 239 264 23.5 10.5
40 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 170.5 183.5 195.5 208.5 233.5 258.5 283.5 181 194 206 219 244 269 294 27 10.5
With Air Cushion (mm) Built-in One-touch Fittings (mm)

Bore size N1 WA Bore size G P Q
20 17.5 13 20 8 6 21.5
25 17.5 13 25 8 6 24.5
32 17.5 13 32 8 6 27
40 21.5 16 40 11 8 32.5
142
Clevis Integrated Style (E)
CM2E Bore size Stroke
LZ + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Z + Stroke LP
H S + Stroke L RR
A K F N N U + 0.058 NA
AL G 2xP G øCD 0
CX – 001
H1 (Rc, NPT, G)
øI
CJ1
NA
øCI
øD
øE
CJP
LH
MM 2 x øLD
Width across flats B1 NN
Effective thread length FL CJ2
LF LG CM2
LT
LY LV
Refer to page 145 for details
of clevis pivot bracket. CG1
Cushion needle MB
With rod boot With air cushion (Width across flats 1.5)
8 l 8
WA WA 45° MB1
CA2
øe
CS1
JH
N1 N1
f CS2
h JW
ZZ + Stroke
Q (mm)
Bore size A AL B1 CD CI CX D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN
0
20 18 15.5 13 8 20 12 8 20 – 0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 12 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
0
25 22 19.5 17 8 22 12 10 26 – 0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 12 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
0
32 22 19.5 17 10 27 20 12 26 – 0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 15 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
0
40 24 21 22 10 33 20 14 32 – 0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 15 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2

Symbol
Bore size P RR S U Z ZZ h
1
Str
oke B3 e f
20 8 9 62 11.5 115 124 Bore size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
1
25 8 9 62 11.5 119 128 20 30 36 18 68 81 93 106 131 156 181
1 25 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 160 185
32 8 12 64 14.5 124 136
1 32 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 160 185
40 4 12 88 14.5 153 165
40 41 46 20 77 90 102 115 140 165 190
With Rod Boot (mm)
Symbol
l Z ZZ
Str
oke JH JW
20 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 142 155 167 180 205 230 255 151 164 176 189 214 239 264 23.5 10.5
25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 146 159 171 184 209 234 259 155 168 180 193 218 243 268 23.5 10.5
32 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 151 164 176 189 214 239 264 163 176 188 201 226 251 276 23.5 10.5
40 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 180 193 205 218 243 268 293 192 205 217 230 255 280 319 27 10.5
D-쏔
With Air Cushion (mm) Built-in One-touch Fittings (mm) Clevis Pivot Bracket (mm)
Bore size N1 WA Bore size G P Q Bore size LD LF LG LH LP LT LV LY LZ
-X쏔
20 17.5 13 20 8 6 21.5 20 6.8 15 30 30 37 3.2 18.4 59 152 Individual
25 17.5 13 25 8 6 24.5 25 6.8 15 30 30 37 3.2 18.4 59 156 -X쏔
32 17.5 13 32 8 6 27 32 9 15 40 40 50 4 28 75 174 Technical
40 21.5 16 40 11 8 32.5 40 9 15 40 40 50 4 28 75 203 data
143
Series CM2
Accessory Bracket Dimensions
Single Knuckle Joint (mm) Single Knuckle Joint (mm)
I-020B/032B Material: Rolled steel I-040B Material: Free cutting sulfur steel
Y (Max.)
øND MM R1 øND
MM
R1
MM
øE1
øND
NX1 A
øE1
NX
U1 H A1 U1
R2 Z (Min.) A1 U1 L1
L1 A NX
A
Applicable
Bore size A H MM NDH10 NX1 U1 R2 Y Z Part no. bore size A A1 E1 L1 MM NDH10 NX R1 U1
20 18 41 M8 x 1.25 9 + 00.058 9 –– 0.1
0.2 14 10 11 66 I-020B 20 46 16 20 36 M8 x 1.25 9 + 00.058 9 –– 0.1
0.2 10 14
25, 32 22 45 M10 x 1.25 9 + 00.058 9 –– 0.1
0.2 14 10 14 69 I-032B 25, 32 48 18 20 38 M10 x 1.25 9 + 00.058 9 –– 0.1
0.2 10 14
– –
40 24 50 M14 x 1.5 12 + 00.070 16 – 0.1
0.3 20 14 13 92 I-040B 40 69 22 24 55 M14 x 1.5 12 + 00.070 16 – 0.1
0.3 15.5 20
Double Knuckle Joint (mm)
Y (Max.)
øND hole H10 MM
Axis d9
NX2
L A
U2 H
R2 Z (Min.)
Bore size A H L MM ND NX2 R2 U2 Y Z

+
20 18 41 25 M8 x 1.25 9 9 + 0.2
0.1 10 14 11 66
+
25, 32 22 45 25 M10 x 1.25 9 9 + 0.2
0.1 10 14 14 69
40 24 50 49.7 M14 x 1.5 12 16 ++ 0.3
0.1 13 25 13 92
Y-020B/Y-032B Material: Rolled steel Y-040B Material: Cast iron

R1 R1
øND hole H10

MM øND hole H10 MM Axis d9
Axis d9
øE 1
øE1
NX
NZ
NX
NZ
L
A1 U1
L1 A1 U1
A L1
A
Applicable Applicable pin Retaining ring
Part no. bore size A A1 E1 L L1 MM ND NX NZ R1 U1 part number Cotter pin size
+
Y-020B 20 46 16 20 25 36 M8 x 1.25 9 9 + 0.2
0.1 18 5 14 CDP-1 Type C 9 for axis
+
Y-032B 25, 32 48 18 20 25 38 M10 x 1.25 9 9 + 0.2
Y-040B 40 68 22 24 49.7 55 M14 x 1.5 12 16 ++ 0.3
0.1 38 13 25 CDP-3 ø3 x 18 l
∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for 40) are attached.
Double Clevis Pin/Material: Carbon steel (mm) Double Knuckle Pin/Material: Carbon steel (mm)
Bore size/ø20, ø25, ø32 Bore size/ø40 Bore size/ø20, ø25, ø32 Bore size/ø40
CDP-1 CDP-2 CDP-1 CDP-3
2 x ø3 2 x ø3
Through hole Through hole
ø
ø
ø
ø
ø
Retaining ring: Type C9 for axis Cotter pin Retaining ring: Type C9 for axis Cotter pin
ø3 x 18 l ø3 x 18 l
∗ Retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are attached. ∗ Retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are attached.
144
Rod End Nut (mm) Clevis Pivot Bracket (For CM2E) (mm)
Material: Carbon steel Material: Rolled steel plate
d
L
øD
LV
C
+ LX
LR øLC hole + 0.15
0.05
H B Axis –– 0.040
0.076
Applicable
Part no. bore size B C D d H
LH
NT-02 20
LT
13 15.0 12.5 M8 x 1.25 5
NT-03 25, 32 17 19.6 16.5 M10 x 1.25 6
CJ1
NT-04 40 22 25.4 21.0 M14 x 1.5 8 LF LG
LE 2 x øLD CJP
LY
CJ2
Mounting Nut (mm) Part no. Applicable L LC LD LE LF LG LH LR LT LX LY LV Applicable pin
bore size part no.
Material: Carbon steel
CM-E020B 20, 25 24.5 8 6.8 22 15 30 30 10 3.2 12 59 18.4 CD-S02
CM2
d CM-E032B 32, 40 34 10 9 25 15 40 40 13 4 20 75 28 CD-S03
CG1
Note 1) Clevis pins and retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are attached.
Note 2) It cannot be used for single clevis style (CM2C) and double clevis style (CM2D).
øD
MB
B
H
Clevis Pin (For CM2E) (mm)
MB1
Applicable
Part no. bore size B C D d H Material: Carbon steel
SN-020B 20 26 30 25.5 M20 x 1.5 8 CA2
ød
øD
SN-032B 25, 32 32 37 31.5 M26 x 1.5 8
SN-040B 40 41 47.3 40.5 M32 x 2.0 10 m l m CS1
t L
t
CS2
Trunnion Nut (mm) Applicable Dd9
Applicable
Part no. d L l m t retaining
H Material: Carbon steel
bore size ring part no.
CD-S02 20, 25 8 –– 0.040
0.076 7.6 24.5 19.5 1.6 0.9 Type C 8 for axis
B
CD-S03 32, 40 10 –– 0.040
0.076 9.6 34 29 1.35 1.15 Type C 10 for axis
Note) Retaining rings are attached.
øC
øD
Applicable
TN-020B 20 26 28 25.5 M20 x 1.5 10
TN-032B 25, 32 32 34 31.5 M26 x 1.5 10
TN-040B 40 41 45 40.5 M32 x 2 10
Regarding mounting bracket, accessory made of stainless steel (Some are not available.), refer to page 1408 for -XB12, External stainless steel cylinder.
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
145
Series CM2
Single Clevis
B° Z + Stroke CX
øCD
°
90
A°
51
40
3.2
ø6.8 20.5
7.5 40 6.8 x 3.4 LX
57 LZ
Rotation Angle (mm)
Bore size Mounting Part no. Applicable bore size CX Z + Stroke CD LX LZ
A° B° A° + B° + 90°
(mm) 20 133
CM2C
20 25 85 200 CM-B032 25 10 137 9 44 60
(Single clevis
25, 32 21 81 192 style) 32 139
40 26 86 202 CM-B040 40 15 177 10 49 65
Note) Pivot brackets do not come with pivot bracket pins and retaining rings.
Rod Side Trunnion Head Side Trunnion

TX Z + Stroke Z + Stroke TX
øCD øCD
51
51
40
40
3.2
3.2
ø6.8 20.5 6.8 x 3.4 ø6.8 20.5

LX LX
7.5 40 7.5 40
LZ LZ
57
57
6.8 x 3.4
(mm)
Rod side trunnion Head side trunnion
Mounting Part no. Applicable bore size TX CD LX LZ
Z + Stroke Z + Stroke
CM-B020 20 32 36 108 8 66 82
CM2U/CM2T
(Rod side/Head side 25 112
CM-B032 40 40 9 74 90
trunnion) 32 114
CM-B040 40 53 44.5 143.5 10 87 103
Pivot Bracket Pivot Bracket Pin (For CM2C)

∗ 2 brackets per set
7.5 40 40 7.5
3.4 3.4
ø6
.8 R .8
3. 4
4 3. ø6
6.8
6.8
R
25
25
R
øDd9
3. 4
3.
ød
4
R
17±0.2
17 ±0.2
øCD +0.15 øCD +0.15

11
+0.05 +0.05
11
R
m l m
t L t
40
40
5.2
5.2
3.2
3.2
28 28
57 57 (mm)
Applicable
(mm) Applicable
Part no. Dd9 d L l m t retaining
bore size
Part no. CD ring part no.
CM-B020 (2) 8 20 to 32 CDP-1 9 –0.040
–0.076 8.6 25 19.2 1.75 1.15 Type C 9 for axis
Note 1) Pivot brackets do not come with pivot
CM-B032 9 bracket pins and retaining rings. 40 CD-S03 10 –0.040
–0.076 9.6 34 29 1.75 1.15 Type C 10 for axis
CM-B040 10 Note 2) Only for trunnion type Note) Pivot bracket pins come with retaining rings.
145-1
Double Acting, Double Rod
Series CM2W
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order
Cushion
Rubber bumper
Rod boot
Nil
Nil None
A Air cushion
∗ Air-hydro cylinder: Rubber J Nylon tarpaulin (One end)
bumber only JJ Nylon tarpaulin (Both ends)
Mounting style K Heat resistant tarpaulin (One end)
Bore size
B Basic style
20 20 mm KK Heat resistant tarpaulin (Both ends)
L Axial foot style Type
25 25 mm
F Flange style Nil Pneumatic
32 32 mm
U Trunnion style H Air-hydro Made to Order
40 40 mm (Refer to page 147 for details.)
CM2W L 40 150 A
With auto switch CDM2W L 40 150 A M9BW
With auto switch Cylinder stroke (mm) Number of
(Built-in magnet) Port thread type (Refer to “Standard Stroke” on auto switches
Nil Rc page 147.)
Nil 2 pcs.
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model TN NPT S 1 pc.
Auto switch
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto TF G n “n” pcs.
Nil Without auto switch
switch is required, there is no need to enter F Built-in one-touch fitting
∗ For the applicable auto switch model, refer
the symbol for the auto switch. ∗ Air-hydro type: Rc only to the table below.
(Example) CDM2WF32-100
Indicator

light

(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9N
5V, 12V IC circuit
M9B
Solid state switch
2-wire 12V —
Connector H7C
Relay,
Yes

PLC
3-wire (NPN) M9NW
3-wire (PNP) M9PW
Grommet M9BW
2-wire 12V —
3-wire —
Yes
(NPN equivalent)
Grommet
100V A93 —
No Yes No Yes No

Reed switch
100V, 200V B54 ∗∗ Relay,

200V or less B64 ∗∗ — PLC
Connector
12V — C73C
2-wire 24V
conduit A34A ∗∗
Yes
100V, 200V — Relay,

PLC
146
Double Acting, Double Rod Series CM2W
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Action Double acting, Double rod
Fluid Air
Lubrication Not required (Non-lube) CJ1
+1.4
Stroke length tolerance 0 mm
Piston speed Rubber bumper: 50 to 750 mm/s, Air cushion: 50 to 1000 mm/s CJP
Cushion Rubber bumper, Air cushion
Rubber bumper 0.27 J 0.4 J 0.65 J 1.2 J
CJ2
Allowable
kinetic energy Air cushion
(Effective cushion length (mm))
0.54 J
(11.0)
0.78 J
(11.0)
1.27 J
(11.0)
2.35 J
(11.8)
CM2
CG1
Standard Stroke
MB
(mm) (mm) (mm)
JIS Symbol
20
MB1
Double acting
25 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
500 CA2
32 200, 250, 300
40 CS1
Note 1) Other intermediate strokes can be manufactured upon receipt of order.
Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible.
CS2
determined by the stroke selection table (front matter 28).
Accessory Bracket Rod Boot Material

Made to Order Specifications
For mounting brackets, refer to pages 144 Symbol Maximum ambient
(For details, refer to pages 1373 to 1498.) Rod boot material
and 145. One side Both sides temperature
Symbol Specifications J JJ Nylon tarpaulin
—XA쏔 Change of rod end shape K KK Heat resistant tarpaulin
—XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (150 ) ∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod
—XB7 Cold resistant cylinder boot itself.
—XB12 External stainless steel cylinder Mounting Bracket/Part No.
—XC3 Special port location Min. Bore size (mm)
Mounting bracket order Description (for min. order)
—XC4 With heavy duty scraper 20 25 32 40
—XC5 Heat resistant cylinder (110 ) Axial foot 2 CM-L020B CM-L032B CM-L040B 2 foot, 1 mounting nut
—XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel Flange 1 CM-F020B CM-F032B CM-F040B 1 flange
—XC13 Auto switch mounting rail style Trunnion (with nuts) 1 CM-T020B CM-T032B CM-T040B 1 trunnion, 1 trunnion nut
—XC22 Fluororubber seals ∗ Order 2 foot brackets for each cylinder unit.
Refer to pages 214 to 218 for cylinders with auto switches.
—XC35 With coil scraper
—XC38 Vacuum (Rod through-hole) Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting
—XC52 Mounting nut with set screw Proper auto switch mounting position (detection at stroke end) and mounting height
Operating range
Switch mounting bracket: Part no.
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
147
Series CM2W
Mounting Rod end
(2)
Single knuckle Double knuckle

Precautions
Rod boot
Mounting nut nut joint joint
Be sure to read before handling.
Basic style Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for
Axial foot style Safety Instructions and pages 3 to
Flange style 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch
Trunnion style
(1) Precautions.
Note
Note 1) Trunnion nuts are attached for trunnion style.
Note 2) Pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for bore size ø40) are shipped together with Warning
double knuckle joint.
1. Do not rotate the cover.
If a cover is rotated when installing a cylinder
Mass (kg) or screwing a fitting into the port, it is likely to
damage the junction part with cover.
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Basic style 0.16 0.25 0.32 0.65 2. Do not operate with the cushion
Axial foot style 0.31 0.41 0.48 0.92
needle in a fully closed condition.
Basic mass Using it in the fully closed state will cause the
Flange style 0.22 0.34 0.41 0.77 cushion seal to be damaged. When adjusting
Trunnion style 0.20 0.32 0.38 0.75 the cushion needle, use the “Hexagon
Additional mass per each 50 mm of stroke
wrench key: nominal size 1.5”.
0.06 0.09 0.13 0.19
Single knuckle joint 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.23 3. Do not open the cushion needle
Option
bracket Double knuckle joint (With pin) 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.20
wide excessively.
If the cushion needle were set to be
Calculation: (Example) CM2WL32-100 completely wide (more than 3 turns from fully
앫 Basic mass····················0.48 (Foot style, ø32)
closed), it would be equivalent to the cylinder
앫 Additional mass·············0.13/50 st
앫 Cylinder stroke··············100 st with no cushion, thus making the impacts
0.48 + 0.13 x 100/50 = 0.74 kg extremely high. Do not use it in such a way.
Besides, using with fully open could give
damage to the piston or cover.
Caution
1. Not able to disassemble.
Cover and cylinder tube are connected to
each other by caulking method, thus making
it impossible to disassemble. Therefore,
internal parts of a cylinder other than rod
2. Use caution to the popping of a
retaining ring.
When replacing rod seals and removing and
mounting a retaining ring, use a proper tool
(retaining ring plier: tool for installing a type
C retaining ring). Even if a proper tool is
used, it is likely to inflict damage to a human
body or peripheral equipment, as a retaining
ring may be flown out of the tip of a plier. Be
much careful with the popping of a retaining
ring. Besides, be certain that a retaining ring
is placed firmly into the groove of rod cover
before supplying air at the time of
installment.
3. Do not touch the cylinder during
operation.
Use caution when handling a cylinder, which
is running at a high speed and a high
frequency, because the surface of a cylinder
tube could get so hot enough as to cause
you get burned.
4. Do not use an air cylinder as an air-
hydro cylinder.
If it uses turbine oil in place of fluids for
cylinder, it may result in oil leakage.
5. Combine the rod end section, so
that a rod boot might not be
twisted.
148 boot to fail during operation.
Air-hydro Built-in One-touch Fittings
CM2WH Mounting style Bore size Stroke Rod boot CM2W Mounting style Bore size F Stroke
Air-hydro Built-in One-touch fittings
A low hydraulic pressure cylinder used at a pressures of 1.0 MPa or This type has the One-touch fitting integrated in a cylinder, which
below. enables to reduce the piping labor and installing space dramatically.
Through the concurrent use of a CC series air-hydro unit, it is
possible to operate at a constant or low speeds or to effect an
intermediate stop, just like a hydraulic unit, while using pneumatic CJ1
equipment such as a valve.
CJP
CJ2
CM2
Specifications Specifications CG1

Type Air-hydro type Action Double acting, Double rod
Fluid Turbine oil Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
MB
Action Double acting, Double rod Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
MB1
Cushion Rubber bumper CA2
Piping One-touch fitting
Piston speed 15 to 300 mm/s Piston speed 50 to 750 mm/s CS1
Ambient and fluid temperature Mounting Basic style, Axial foot style, Flange style, Trunnion style
Thread tolerance +1.4 * Auto switch can be mounted. CS2
Stroke length tolerance 0 mm
Applicable Tubing O.D./I.D.
Cushion Rubber bumper (Standard equipment)
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Mounting Basic style, Axial foot style, Flange style, Trunnion style
* Auto switch can be mounted. Applicable tubing
O.D./I.D. (mm) 6/4 6/4 6/4 8/6

앫 For construction, refer to page 151. polyurethane tube.
앫 Since the dimensions of mounting style is the same as pages 153 to
155, refer to those pages. Caution
2. Refer to Fittings and Tubing Precautions (Best Pneumatics No. 6) for

앫 For other specifications, refer to page 147.
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
149
Series CM2W
Clean Series Copper/Fluorine-free
10-CM2W Mounting style Bore size Stroke 20-CM2W Mounting style Bore size Stroke
Clean Series (With relief port) Copper/fluorine-free
The type which is applicable for using inside the clean room graded The type which prevents copper based ions from generating by
Class 100 by making an actuator’s rod section a double seal changing the copper based materials into electroless nickel plated
construction and discharging by relief port directly to the outside of treatment or non-copper materials in order to eliminate the effects by
clean room. copper based ions or fluororesins over the color cathode ray tube.
Action Double acting, Double rod Action Double acting, Double rod
Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40 Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.08 MPa Min. operating pressure 0.08 MPa
Cushion Rubber bumper Cushion Rubber bumper Air cushion
Relief port size M5 x 0.8 Piston speed 50 to 750 mm/s 50 to 1000 mm/s
Piston speed 30 to 400 mm/s
Basic style, Axial foot style,
Mounting Flange style, Trunnion style
Mounting Basic style, Axial foot style, Flange style
Construction
Construction
Standard port Relief port
ø20, ø25
The above shows the case of rubber bumper.

Standard port
Relief port
Relief port
ø32, ø40
For details, refer to the separate catalog, “Pneumatic Clean Series”.
150
Construction
Rubber bumper
CJ1
CJP
CJ2
Air-hydro
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
With air cushion
CS1
CS2
Component Parts Replacement Part: Seal

No. Description Material Note 쎲With rubber bumper/Air Cushion/Built-in One-touch Fittings
1 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized Part no.
2 Cylinder tube Stainless steel No. Description Material
20 25 32 40
3 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated
4 Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated 14 Rod seal NBR PDU-8Z PDU-10Z PDU-12LZ PDU-14LZ
5 Bushing Copper oil-impregnated sintered alloy
6 Seal retainer Stainless steel 쎲Air-hydro
Part no.
7 Retaining ring Carbon steel Phosphate coated No. Description Material D-쏔
8 Bumper A Urethane 20 25 32 40
9 Bumper B Urethane 14 Rod seal NBR HDU-8 HDU-10 HDU-12L HDU-14 -X쏔
10 Piston seal NBR
∗ Since the seal kit does not include a grease pack, order it separately. Individual
11 Piston gasket NBR
Grease pack part no.: GR-S-010 (10 g) -X쏔
12 Mounting nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
13 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
Technical
data
151
Series CM2W
Basic Style (B)

CM2WB Bore size Stroke
Width across flats B2 2xP
Width across flats B1 H1 H2 G (Rc, NPT, G) G 2 x NN MM
Width across flats KA øI
2 x øEh8
NA
øD
øD
MM AL AL NA
A K F N N F K A
H S + Stroke H + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
8 l 8
With rod boot
(One side)
øe
JH
f
h JW
ZZ + Stroke
Width across flats B3 Width across flats B3
With rod boot
(Both sides)
øe
øe
JH
8 8 JW
8 l f f l + Stroke 8
h h + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
45° WA WA 45°
Cushion needle Cushion needle
With air cushion (Width across flats 1.5) (Width across flats 1.5)
N1 N1
Q
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 H2 I K KA MM N NA NN P S ZZ
20 18 15.5 13 26 8 0
20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 62 144
25 22 19.5 17 32 10 0
26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 62 152
32 22 19.5 17 32 12 0
26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 64 154
40 24 21 22 41 14 0
32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 88 188
With Rod Boot (mm)

h l ZZ (Both sides)
Bore size (mm) B3 e f
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300
20 30 36 18 68 81 93 106 131 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 198 224 248 274 324
25 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 206 232 256 282 332
32 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 208 234 258 284 334
40 41 46 20 77 90 102 115 140 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 242 268 292 318 368
ZZ (One side) Bore size (mm) N1 WA Bore size (mm) G P Q
Bore size (mm) JH JW
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 20 17.5 13 20 8 6 21.5
20 171 184 196 209 234 23.5 10.5 25 17.5 13 25 8 6 24.5
25 179 192 204 217 242 23.5 10.5 32 17.5 13 32 8 6 27
32 181 194 206 219 244 23.5 10.5 40 21.5 16 40 11 8 32.5
40 215 228 240 253 278 27 10.5
152

CM2WL Bore size Stroke
H H + Stroke
A K F G 2xP G F 2 x NN K A
Width across flats KA Width across flats KA
AL H2 (Rc, NPT, G) Effective thread AL
Width across flats B1 H1 length 2 x FL
øD
CJ1
øD
øI
B
LH
MM Width across
flats B2 MM
Width across flats 쏔NA CJP
N N 4 x øLD
LT
Z
Y X S + Stroke X Y
Z + Stroke
2 x øLC CJ2
LS + Stroke LX
ZZ + 2 x Stroke LZ
CM2
CG1
With air cushion Cushion needle

MB
WA WA 45°
MB1
CA2
CS1
N1 N1
CS2

Q
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 D F FL G H H1 H2 I K KA LC LD LH LS LT LX LZ MM N NA NN P S X Y Z ZZ
20 18 15.5 40 13 26 8 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 4 6.8 25 102 3.2 40 55 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 62 20 8 21 144
25 22 19.5 47 17 32 10 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 4 6.8 28 102 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 62 20 8 25 152
18
32 22 19.5 47 17 32 12 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 4 6.8 28 104 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 20 8 25 154
40 24 21 54 22 41 14 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 4 7 30 134 3.2 55 75 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 88 23 10 27 188
With Air Cushion (mm) Built-in One-touch Fittings (mm) ∗ In the case of with rod boot, refer to basic style on
page 152 and f dimension on page 136.
Bore size (mm) N1 WA Bore size (mm) G P Q
20 17.5 13 20 8 6 21.5
25 17.5 13 25 8 6 24.5
32 17.5 13 32 8 6 27
40 21.5 16 40 11 8 32.5
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
153
Series CM2W
Flange Style (F)
CM2WF Bore size Stroke
Width across flats B2 Effective thread length 2 x FL
4 x øFD 2 x øFD Width across flats KA H2 G 2xP G 2 x NN MM
mounting mounting hole Width across (Rc, NPT, G)
C2
hole flats B1 H 1
øD
FY
øD
B
øI
øE
MM AL
FX K
FZ A FT Width across flats 쏔NA AL
Z N N F K A
ø40 ø20 to ø32 ZZ + 2 x Stroke

45° (Width across flats 1.5)
WA WA
N1 N1

Q
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 C2 D E F FD FL FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I K KA MM
0
20 18 15.5 34 13 26 30 8 20 –0.033 13 7 10.5 4 60 — 75 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25
0
25 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 –0.033 13 7 10.5 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25
0
32 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 –0.033 13 7 10.5 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25
0
40 24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 –0.039 16 7 13.5 5 66 36 82 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5

Bore size (mm) N NA NN P S Z ZZ Bore size (mm) N1 WA Bore size (mm) G P Q
∗ In the case of with
20 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 62 37 144 20 17.5 13 20 8 6 21.5 rod boot, refer to
25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 62 41 152 25 17.5 13 25 8 6 24.5 basic style on page
18 32 32 27 152 and f dimension
32 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 41 154 17.5 13 8 6
on page 137.
40 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 88 45 188 40 21.5 16 40 11 8 32.5
154
Trunnion Style (U)

CM2WU Bore size Stroke
Width across flats B2 G 2xP G Width across flats KA

Width across flats B1 H1 (Rc, NPT, G) 2 x NN
MM
øTD
øTY
øD
øD
øI
øE
CJ1
MM Effective thread
AL length
Width across flats KA A K TT Width across flats 쏔NA 2 x FL AL CJP
Z N N F K A
TX
TZ
H S + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
H + Stroke CJ2
CM2
CG1
With air cushion
Cushion needle MB
45°
WA WA MB1
CA2
CS1
N1 N1
CS2

Q
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 I K KA MM N NA NN P S
20 18 15.5 13 26 8
0
20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 62
25 22 19.5 17 32 10
0
26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 62
32 22 19.5 17 32 12
0
26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 64
0 14
40 24 21 22 41 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88

Bore size (mm) TD TT TX TY TZ Z ZZ Bore size (mm) N1 WA Bore size (mm) G P Q
20 8 10 32 32 52 36 144 20 17.5 13 20 8 6 21.5 ∗ In the case of with
rod boot, refer to
25 9 10 40 40 60 40 152 25 17.5 13 25 8 6 24.5
basic style on page
32 9 10 40 40 60 40 154 32 17.5 13 32 8 6 27 152 and f dimension
40 10 11 53 53 77 44.5 188 40 21.5 16 40 11 8 32.5 on page 141.
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
155
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend
Series CM2
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order
Mounting style Piping
B Basic style T Head side trunnion style Nil Rc (Screw-in piping)
L Axial foot style E Clevis integrated style F Built-in One-touch fittings
FZ flange style
Cylinder stroke (mm)
C Single clevis style (Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 157.)
UZ trunnion style
U Rod side trunnion style Made to Order
CM2 L 32 150 S
With auto switch CDM2 L 32 150 S M9BW
Number of
With auto switch Action auto switches
(Built-in magnet) Bore size S Single acting, Spring return Nil 2 pcs.
20 20 mm
T Single acting, Spring extend S 1 pc.
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model 25 25 mm
n “n” pcs.
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto 32 32 mm
switch is required, there is no need to enter 40 40 mm Auto switch

the symbol for the auto switch. Nil Without auto switch
(Example) CDM2F40-100T ∗ For the applicable auto switch model, refer
to the table below.
Indicator

light

(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9N
5V, 12V IC circuit
M9B
Solid state switch
2-wire 12V —
Connector H7C
Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5V, 12V G39A IC circuit
Relay,
Yes
conduit 2-wire 24V 12V — K39A —

PLC
3-wire (NPN) M9NW
3-wire (PNP) M9PW
Grommet M9BW
2-wire 12V —
3-wire —
Yes
(NPN equivalent)
Grommet
100V A93 —
No Yes No Yes No

Reed switch
100V, 200V B54 Relay,

200V or less B64 — PLC
Connector
12V — C73C
2-wire 24V
Terminal — A33A PLC
conduit A34A
Yes
100V, 200V — Relay,

DIN terminal A44A
PLC
1 m ·······M (Example) M9NWM ∗ D-A9쏔V/M9쏔V/M9쏔WV and D-M9쏔A(V)L cannot be mounted.
5 m ······· Z (Example) M9NWZ
None ······· N (Example) H7CN
156
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend Series CM2
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Action Single acting, Spring return/Single acting, Spring extend
Type Pneumatic
Fluid Air
Spring return
Minimum operating Single acting, Spring return 0.18 MPa CJ1
pressure
Single acting, Spring extend 0.23 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature CJP
Stroke length tolerance +1.4
CJ2
0 mm
Spring extend Piston speed 50 to 750 mm/s CM2

CG1
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) (1)
MB
20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
MB1
25 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
32 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 CA2
40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250
Note 1) Other intermediate strokes can be manufactured upon receipt of order. CS1
Note 2) Please contact SMC for longer strokes. CS2
JIS Symbol Mounting Bracket
Single acting,
Spring extend For the mounting bracket part numbers other than
Spring return basic style, refer to page 158.
Theoretical Output
Refer to “Theoretical Output 1” on page 1573.
Spring Reaction Force

Refer to page 1570 (Table 3: Spring Reaction Force).

(For details, refer to pages 1373 to 1498.)
Boss-cut style
Symbol Specifications
—XA쏔 Change of rod end shape Boss for the head side cover bracket is eliminated and the total length of cylinder
—XB12 External stainless steel cylinder is shortened.
Comparison of the Full Length Dimension (Versus standard type) (mm)
Refer to pages 214 to 218 for cylinders with Mounting style D-쏔
auto switches. 쐽 Boss-cut basic style (BZ) 쐽 Boss-cut flange style (FZ)
Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting 쐽 Boss-cut trunnion style (UZ) -X쏔
Proper auto switch mounting position
Individual
(detection at stroke end) and mounting height -X쏔
Operating range
Switch mounting bracket: Part no. Technical
data
157
Series CM2
Accessory Standard equipment Option Accessory Bracket
Single Double (3) (4)
Mounting Rod end Clevis knuckle knuckle Clevis For mounting brackets, refer to pages 144 and 145
Mounting nut nut pin joint joint bracket
Basic style
Axial foot style
(1)
(1)
Single clevis style
(3) (1) (5)
Double clevis style
(2)
(2)
Head side trunnion style
Boss-cut basic style
Boss-cut flange style
Boss-cut trunnion style
Note 1) Mounting nuts are not attached for clevis integrated style, single clevis, and
double clevis styles.
Note 2) Trunnion nuts are attached for rod side trunnion and head side trunnion
styles.
Note 3) Pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for bore size ø40) are shipped together with
double clevis and double knuckle joint.
Note 4) Pin and retaining ring are shipped together with clevis pivot bracket.
Mounting Bracket/Part No.

Min. Bore size (mm)
20 25 32 40
Flange 1 CM-F020B CM-F032B CM-F040B 1 flange
Single clevis 1 CM-C020B CM-C032B CM-C040B 1 single clevis, 3 liners
∗∗
Double clevis ∗ ∗ ∗ 1 double clevis, 3 liners,
(with pins) 1 CM-D020B CM-D032B CM-D040B
1 clevis pins, 2 retaining rings
Trunnion (with nuts) 1 CM-T020B CM-T032B CM-T040B 1 trunnion, 1 trunnion nut
∗ Order 2 foot brackets for each cylinder unit.
∗∗ 3 Liners are attached with a clevis bracket for adjusting the mounting angle.
∗ ∗ ∗ Clevis pins and retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are attached.
158
Mass
Spring Return (kg) Spring Extend (kg)
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
25 stroke 0.20 0.30 0.42 0.77 25 stroke 0.19 0.29 0.40 0.74
50 stroke 0.22 0.33 0.46 0.84 50 stroke 0.21 0.32 0.44 0.81
75 stroke 0.27 0.42 0.58 1.03 75 stroke 0.25 0.39 0.54 0.97
Basic 100 stroke 0.29 0.45 0.63 1.09 Basic 100 stroke 0.27 0.42 0.58 1.03
mass mass
125 stroke 0.35 0.54 0.76 1.29 125 stroke 0.32 0.49 0.69 1.20 CJ1
150 stroke 0.37 0.57 0.80 1.36 150 stroke 0.34 0.52 0.73 1.27
200 stroke — — 0.97 1.61 200 stroke — — 0.88 1.49
CJP
250 stroke — — — 1.87 250 stroke — — — 1.72
CJ2
Foot style 0.15 0.16 0.16 0.27 Foot style 0.15 0.16 0.16 0.27
Flange style 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.12 Flange style 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.12 CM2
Single clevis style 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.09 Single clevis style 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.09
Double clevis style 0.05 0.06 0.06 0.13 Double clevis style 0.05 0.06 0.06 0.13
CG1
Mounting Trunnion style 0.04 0.07 0.07 0.10 Mounting Trunnion style 0.04 0.07 0.07 0.10
bracket bracket MB
mass Clevis integrated style –0.02 –0.02 –0.01 –0.04 mass Clevis integrated style –0.02 –0.02 –0.01 –0.04
Boss-cut basic style –0.01 –0.02 –0.02 –0.03 Boss-cut basic style –0.01 –0.02 –0.02 –0.03 MB1
Boss-cut flange style 0.05 0.07 0.07 0.09 Boss-cut flange style 0.05 0.07 0.07 0.09
Boss-cut trunnion style 0.03 0.05 0.05 0.07 Boss-cut trunnion style 0.03 0.05 0.05 0.07
CA2
Pivot bracket (With pin) 0.07 0.07 0.14 0.14 Pivot bracket (With pin) 0.07 0.07 0.14 0.14 CS1
Option Single knuckle joint 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.23 Option Single knuckle joint 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.23
bracket Double knuckle joint (With pin) 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.20 bracket Double knuckle joint (With pin) 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.20 CS2
Calculation: (Example) CM2L32-100S (Bore size ø32, Foot style, 100 stroke)
0.63 (Basic mass) + 0.16 (Mounting bracket mass) = 0.79 kg
Built-in One-touch Fitting
CM2 Mounting style Bore size F Stroke Action

Specifications
Built-in One-touch fitting
Action Single acting, Spring return Single acting, Spring extend
This type has the One-touch fitting integrated in a cylinder, Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
which enables to reduce the piping labor and installing space Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
dramatically.
Min. operating pressure 0.18 MPa 0.23 MPa
Piping Built-in One-touch fitting
Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style,
Mounting style, Rod side trunnion style, Head side trunnion style,
Clevis integrated style, Boss-cut style
Applicable Tubing O.D./I.D.

앫 For construction, refer to page 161. Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
앫 For other specifications, refer to page 157. Applicable tubing
6/4 6/4 6/4 8/6
O.D./I.D. (mm)

polyurethane tubing.
Caution D-쏔
2. Refer to Fittings and Tubing Precautions (Best Pneumatics No. 6) for -X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
159
Series CM2
Copper/Fluorine-free
20-CM2 Mounting style Bore size Stroke Action Precautions
Copper/fluorine-free Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front
matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions and pages
The type which prevents copper based ions from generating by
changing the copper based materials into electroless nickel
3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
plated treatment or non-copper materials in order to eliminate
the effects by copper based ions or fluororesins over the color Operating Precoutions
cathode ray tube.
Warning
If a cover is rotated when installing a cylinder or screwing a
fitting into the port, it is likely to damage the junction part with
cover.
Caution
Specifications 1. Not able to disassemble.
Cover and cylinder tube are connected to each other by
caulking method, thus making it impossible to disassemble.
Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40 Therefore, internal parts of a cylinder other than rod seal are
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa not replaceable.
Min. operating pressure 0.18 MPa 0.23 MPa 2. Use caution to the popping of a retaining ring.
Cushion Rubber bumper When replacing rod seals and removing and mounting a
Piston speed 50 to 750 mm/s retaining ring, use a proper tool (retaining ring plier: tool for
installing a type C retaining ring). Even if a proper tool is used,
Head side flange style, Single clevis style, it is likely to inflict damage to a human body or peripheral
Mounting Double clevis style, Rod side trunnion style, equipment, as a retaining ring may be flown out of the tip of a
Head side trunnion style, Clevis integrated style, plier. Be much careful with the popping of a retaining ring.
Boss-cut style Besides, be certain that a retaining ring is placed firmly into
∗ Auto switch can be mounted. the groove of rod cover before supplying air at the time of
installment.
3. Do not touch the cylinder during operation.
Construction Use caution when handling a cylinder, which is running at a
high speed and a high frequency, because the surface of a
cylinder tube could get so hot enough as to cause you get
burned.
One-touch fitting is press-fit into the cover, thus cannot be
replaced.
∗ The above shows the case of single acting, spring return type.
160
Construction
Spring return
CJ1
CJP
Boss-cut style Clevis integrated style CJ2
Spring return, CM2

Built-in One-touch fitting CG1
MB
MB1
Spring extend CA2
CS1
CS2
Boss-cut Clevis integrated

style style
Spring extend,
Built-in One-touch fitting
Component Parts
1 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 13 Clevis bushing Copper oil-impregnated sintered alloy
2A Head cover A Aluminum alloy Clear anodized ∗ 14 Bumper Urethane
2B Head cover B Aluminum alloy Clear anodized ∗∗ 15 Bumper A Urethane
2C Head cover C Aluminum alloy Clear anodized ∗∗∗ 16 Bumper B Urethane
3 Cylinder tube Stainless steel 17 Retaining ring Stainless steel
4 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 18 Piston seal NBR
5 Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chromium electroplated 19 Piston gasket NBR
6 Bushing Copper oil-impregnated sintered alloy 20 Wear ring Resin
7 Seal retainer Stainless steel 21 Mounting nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
8 Return spring Steel wire Zinc chromated 22 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
9 Spring guide Aluminum alloy Chromated D-쏔
10 Spring seat Aluminum alloy Chromated Replacement Part: Seal
11 Plug with fixed orifice Alloy steel Black zinc chromated 쎲With Rubber Bumper, Built-in One-touch Fitting -X쏔
No. Description Material Individual
∗ Basic style, ∗∗ Boss-cut style, ∗∗∗ Clevis integrated style 20 25 32 40
-X쏔
23 Rod seal NBR PDU-8Z PDU-10Z PDU-12LZ PDU-14LZ
∗ Since the seal kit does not include a grease pack, order it separately. Technical
Grease pack part no.: GR-S-010 (10 g) data
161
Series CM2
Basic Style (B)
CM2B Bore size Stroke S

T
Spring return G
Width across flats B2 H2 Plug with fixed orifice 2 x NN
P
Width across flats B1 H1
øI
2 x øEh8
NA
øD
MM Effective thread
AL NA
Width across flatsKA length 2 x FL
A K F N N
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke
Spring extend
Width across flats B2 H2 G P Plug with fixed orifice 2 x NN
øI
2 x øEh8
NA
øD
MM
Width across flatsKA AL
A K F N N NA
H + Stroke S + Stroke F
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Boss-cut style
Spring return ZZ + Stroke

Spring extend ZZ + 2 x Stroke

Spring return
Spring extend
Q
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 H2 I K KA MM N NA NN P
20 18 15.5 13 26 8
0
20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18
25 22 19.5 17 32 10
0
26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18
32 22 19.5 17 32 12
0
26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18
0 14
40 24 21 22 41 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
Dimensions by Stroke (mm) Boss-cut Style (mm)
Stroke Stroke
Sym 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 Sym 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
Bore bol Bore bol
size (mm) S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ size (mm) ZZ ZZ ZZ ZZ ZZ
20 87 141 112 166 137 191 — — — — 20 128 153 178 — —
25 87 145 112 170 137 195 — — — — 25 132 157 182 — —
32 89 147 114 172 139 197 164 222 — — 32 134 159 184 209 —
40 113 179 138 204 163 229 188 254 213 279 40 163 188 213 238 263
Built-in One-touch Fittings (mm)

Bore size (mm) G P Q
20 8 6 21.5
25 8 6 24.5
32 8 6 27
40 11 8 32.5
162
S
CM2L Bore size Stroke T
Spring return H Width across flats B2
A K F
Width across flats B1 AL H2 Plug with fixed orifice P G F 2 x NN
H1 (Effective thread length
2 x FL)
øD
øI
CJ1
B
2 x øLC
LH
4 x øLD
MM N Width across flats 쏔NA N CJP
Y S + Stroke X Y
LT
Width across flats KA X LX

Z LS + Stroke LZ CJ2
ZZ + Stroke
CM2
CG1
Spring extend
H + Stroke
MB
Width across A K F G P Plug with fixed orifice F 2 x NN
flats B1 AL H2 (Effective thread length MB1
H1 2 x FL)
CA2
øD
øI
B
2 x øLC
CS1
LH
Width across 4 x øLD
flats B2
MM Width across
flats KA N Width across flats 쏔NA N CS2
LT
Y X S + Stroke X Y
Z + Stroke LS + Stroke LX
ZZ + 2 x Stroke LZ

One-touch fitting port size øP
Spring return
Spring extend
Q
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 D F FL G H H1 H2 I K KA LC LD LH LT LX LZ MM N NA NN P X Y Z
20 18 15.5 40 13 26 8 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 4 6.8 25 3.2 40 55 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 20 8 21
25 22 19.5 47 17 32 10 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 4 6.8 28 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 20 8 25
32 22 19.5 47 17 32 12 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 4 6.8 28 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 20 8 25
40 24 21 54 22 41 14 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 4 7 30 3.2 55 75 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 23 10 27
Dimensions by Stroke (mm) Built-in One-touch Fittings (mm)
Stroke 151 to 200
Sym 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 201 to 250 Bore size
Bore bol P Q
size (mm) LS S ZZ LS S ZZ LS S ZZ LS S ZZ LS S ZZ (mm)
20 127 87 156 152 112 181 177 137 206 — — — — — — 20 6 21.5
25 127 87 160 152 112 185 177 137 210 — — — — — — 25 6 24.5
32 129 89 162 154 114 187 179 139 212 204 164 237 — — — 32 6 27 D-쏔
40 159 113 196 184 138 221 209 163 246 234 188 271 259 213 296 40 8 32.5
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
163
Series CM2

S
CM2F Bore size Stroke T
Spring return Width across flats B1 H1
H2 Plug with fixed orifice P G 2 x NN
4 x øFD C 2
Mounting hole Width across
flats KA
FY
øD
øI
øE
B
2 x øFD AL
FX MM K FT Width across flats 쏔NA
A
ø40 Mounting hole FZ N
Z N
ø20 to ø32 F
H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Spring extend
4 x øFD
Mounting hole Width across Width across flats B2 H2 G RcP
2 x øFD Plug with fixed orifice 2 x NN
flats B1 H1
Mounting hole
øI
FY
øD
øE
B
C2
FX MM AL
ø40 FZ A K FT Width across N
Z + Stroke N flats 쏔NA Effective thread length 2 x FL
ø20 to ø32 H + Stroke S + Stroke F
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Boss-cut style


Spring return
Spring extend
Q
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 C2 D E F FD FL FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I K KA MM N NA NN P Z
20 18 15.5 34 13 26 30 8
0
20 –0.033 13 7 10.5 4 60 — 75 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 37
25 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 –0.033 13
0
7 10.5 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 41
32
0
22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 –0.033 13 7 10.5 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 41
40 24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 –00.039 16 7 13.5 5 66 36 82 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 45
Stroke Stroke
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
Sym Sym
Bore bol Bore bol
size (mm) S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ size (mm) ZZ ZZ ZZ ZZ ZZ
20 87 141 112 166 137 191 — — — — 20 128 153 178 — —
25 87 145 112 170 137 195 — — — — 25 132 157 182 — —
32 89 147 114 172 139 197 164 222 — — 32 134 159 184 209 —
40 113 179 138 204 163 229 188 254 213 279 40 163 188 213 238 263
Built-in One-touch Fittings (mm)

Bore size (mm) P Q
20 6 21.5
25 6 24.5
32 6 27
40 8 32.5
164
S
CM2G Bore size Stroke T
Spring return
Width across flats B1 H2 Width across flats B2 2 x øFD 4 x øFD
H1 2 x NN Plug with fixed orifice P G Mounting hole Mounting hole
C2
CJ1
FY
øD
øI
B
øE
CJP
MM AL Width across flats 쏔NA FX
N FZ ø40
A
H
K F N
S + Stroke FT
CJ2
ø20 to ø32
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CM2
CG1
MB
Spring extend
Width across flats KA Effective thread length 2 x FL MB1
Width across Width across 2 x øFD
flats B1 H1 2 x NN G P Plug with fixed orifice H2 flats B2 Mounting hole 4 x øFD
CA2
C2 Mounting hole
CS1
øD
FY
øI
B
øE
CS2
MM AL FX
K Width across flats 쏔NA N FZ ø40
A F N
H + Stroke S + Stroke FT ø20 to ø32
Z + 2 x Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke

Spring return
Spring extend
Q
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 C2 D E F FD FL FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I K KA MM N NA NN P
20 18 15.5 34 13 26 30 8
0
20 –0.033 13 7 10.5 4 60 — 75 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18
25 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 –0.033 13
0
7 10.5 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18
32 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 –0.033 13
0
7 10.5 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18
40 24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 –0.039 16
0
7 13.5 5 66 36 82 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14

Stroke 151 to 200
Sym
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 201 to 250 Bore size
Bore bol P Q
size (mm) S Z ZZ S Z ZZ S Z ZZ S Z ZZ S Z ZZ (mm)
20 87 132 141 112 157 166 137 182 191 — — — — — — 20 6 21.5
25 87 136 145 112 161 170 137 186 195 — — — — — — 25 6 24.5
32 89 138 147 114 163 172 139 188 197 164 213 222 — — — 32
D-쏔
6 27
40 113 168 179 138 193 204 163 218 229 188 243 254 213 268 279 40 8 32.5
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
165
Series CM2

S
CM2C Bore size Stroke T
Spring return Effective thread length FL øCD
Width across flats B1 H1 NN Plug with fixed orifice P
G
NA
øCI
øD
øE
MM AL CX
A K F N N U NA
H S + Stroke L
Z + Stroke RR
ZZ + Stroke
Spring extend
Effective thread length FL
Width across flats B1 H1 NN G P Plug with fixed orifice øCD
NA
øD
øCI
øE
MM AL
A K F N N U
H + Stroke S + Stroke L CX
Z + 2 x Stroke RR NA
ZZ + 2 x Stroke

Spring return
Spring extend
Q
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CD CI CX D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN P RR U
20 18 15.5 13 9 24 10 8 0
20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 9 14
25 22 19.5 17 9 30 10 10 0
26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 9 14
32 22 19.5 17 9 30 10 12 0
26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 9 14
40 24 21 22 10 38 15 14 0
32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 11 18
Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
Sym
Bore size
Bore bol P Q
20 87 158 167 112 183 192 137 208 217 — — — — — — 20 6 21.5
25 87 162 171 112 187 196 137 212 221 — — — — — — 25 6 24.5
32 89 164 173 114 189 198 139 214 223 164 239 248 — — — 32 6 27
40 113 202 213 138 227 238 163 252 263 188 277 288 213 302 313 40 8 32.5
166
S
CM2D Bore size Stroke T
Spring return Effective thread length FL +0.058

øCD hole H10 0
Width across flats KA Plug with fixed orifice G –0.040
P Axis d9 –0.076
Width across flats B1 H1 NN
øI
NA
øCI
øD
CJ1
øE
MM AL CJP
A K F N N U CX
H S + Stroke L
RR
CZ
CL
CJ2
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke NA
CM2
CG1
MB
Spring extend MB1
øCD hole H10 0
+0.058 CA2
Width across flats KA Plug with fixed orifice
NN G P –0.040
Axis d9
Width across flats B1 H1 –0.076
CS1
øI
CS2
NA
øD
øCI
øE
MM AL
A K F N N U CX
H + Stroke S + Stroke L CZ
Z + 2 x Stroke RR CL
ZZ + 2 x Stroke NA

Built-in One-touch fittings Spring return
Spring extend
Q
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CD CI CL CX CZ D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN P RR U
20 18 15.5 13 9 24 25 10 19 8 0
20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 9 14
25 22 19.5 17 9 30 25 10 19 10 26
0
13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 9 14
–0.033
32 22 19.5 17 9 30 25 10 19 12 0
26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 9 14
40 24 21 22 10 38 41.2 15 30 14 0
32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 11 18
Stroke 151 to 200
Sym
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 201 to 250 Bore size
Bore bol P Q
20 87 158 167 112 183 192 137 208 217 — — — — — — 20 6 21.5
25 87 162 171 112 187 196 137 212 221 — — — — — — 25 6 24.5
32 89 164 173 114 189 198 139 214 223 164 239 248 — — — 32 6 27
D-쏔
40 113 202 213 138 227 238 163 252 263 188 277 288 213 302 313 40 8 32.5
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
167
Series CM2

S
CM2U Bore size Stroke T
Spring return Width across flats B2

Width across flats KA Plug with fixed orifice P G 2 x NN
øTD
øI
øD
øTY
øE
AL Effective thread length 2 x FL
MM K TT Width across flats 쏔NA
TX A
TZ Z
N N
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke
Spring extend
Width across flats B2 G P Plug with fixed orifice 2 x NN
Width across
flats B1 H1
øTD
øTY
øD
øI
øE
MM Effective thread length 2 x FL
AL
A K TT
Z + Stroke N Width across flats 쏔NA N
TX H + Stroke S + Stroke F
TZ ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Boss-cut style


Spring return
Spring extend
Q
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 I K KA MM N NA NN P TD TT TX TY TZ Z
20 18 15.5 13 26 8
0
20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 8 10 32 32 52 36
25 22 19.5 17 32 10
0
26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 9 10 40 40 60 40
32 22 19.5 17 32 12
0
26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 9 10 40 40 60 40
40 24 21 22 41 14
0
32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 10 11 53 53 77 44.5
Dimensions by Stroke (mm) Boss-cut Style (mm) Built-in One-touch
Stroke
Sym
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 Stroke
Sym
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 Fittings (mm)
Bore bol Bore bol
size (mm) S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ size (mm) ZZ ZZ ZZ ZZ ZZ Bore size (mm) P Q
20 87 141 112 166 137 191 — — — — 20 128 153 178 — — 20 6 21.5
25 87 145 112 170 137 195 — — — — 25 132 157 182 — — 25 6 24.5
32 89 147 114 172 139 197 164 222 — — 32 134 159 184 209 — 32 6 27
40 113 179 138 204 163 229 188 254 213 279 40 163 188 213 238 263 40 8 32.5
168
S
CM2T Bore size Stroke T
Spring return Effective thread length 2 x FL

Width acros
2 x NN Plug with fixed orifice P G flats B2
øTD
øTY
øD
øI
øE
CJ1
MM AL
A K F N
Width across flats 쏔NA
N
TX CJP
TZ
H S + Stroke TT
Z + Stroke CJ2
ZZ + Stroke
CM2
CG1
MB
Spring extend Width acros
MB1
G P flats B2
Width across flats B1 H1 Plug with fixed orifice
2 x NN
Width across flats KA CA2
øTD
øTY
øD
CS1
øE
øI
MM AL CS2
A K F N Width across flats 쏔NA N TT
H + Stroke S + Stroke
Z + 2 x Stroke TX
ZZ + 2 x Stroke TZ

Spring return
Spring extend
Q
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 I K KA MM N NA NN P TD TT TX TY TZ
20 18 15.5 13 26 8 0
13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 8 10 32 32 52
20 –0.033
25 22 19.5 17 32 10 0
13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 9 10 40 40 60
26 –0.033
32 22 19.5 17 32 12 0
13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 9 10 40 40 60
26 –0.033
40 24 21 22 41 14 0
32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 10 11 53 53 77
Dimensions by Stroke (mm) Built-in One-touch
Stroke
Sym
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 Fittings (mm)
Bore bol
size (mm) S Z ZZ S Z ZZ S Z ZZ S Z ZZ S Z ZZ Bore size (mm) P Q
20 87 133 143 112 158 168 137 183 193 — — — — — — 20 6 21.5
25 87 137 147 112 162 172 137 187 197 — — — — — — 25 6 24.5
32 89 139 149 114 164 174 139 189 199 164 214 224 — — — 32 6 27
40 113 168.5 179 138 193.5 204 163 218.5 229 188 243.5 254 213 268.5 279 40 8 32.5
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
169
Series CM2

S
CM2E Bore size Stroke T
LZ + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Spring return Z + Stroke LP
H S + Stroke L RR
A K F N N U NA
P G øCD CX
AL Plug with fixed orifice
H1
øI
NA
øCI
øD
øE
LH
MM x øLD
Width across flats B1 NN Effective thread length FL
LF LG
LT
LY LV
Spring extend Refer to page 145 for the details of clevis pivot brackets.
LZ + 2 x Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Z + 2 x Stroke LP
H + Stroke S + Stroke L RR
A K F N RcP Plug with fixed orifice N U NA
AL G øCD CX
H1
øI
NA
øCI
øD
øE
LH
MM x øLD
Width across flats B1 NN Effective thread length FL
LF LG
LT
LY LV
One-touch fitting port size
Spring extend
Spring return
Q
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CD CI CX D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN P RR U
20 18 15.5 13 8 20 12 8 0
13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 12 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 9 11.5
20 –0.033
25 22 19.5 17 8 22 12 10 0
13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 12 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 9 11.5
26 –0.033
32 0 18
22 19.5 17 10 27 20 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 15 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 12 14.5
40 24 21 22 10 33 20 14 0
32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 15 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 12 14.5
Dimensions by Stroke (mm)
Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
Sym
Bore bol
size (mm) S Z ZZ S Z ZZ S Z ZZ S Z ZZ S Z ZZ
20 87 140 149 112 165 174 137 190 199 — — — — — —
25 87 144 153 112 169 178 137 194 203 — — — — — —
32 89 149 161 114 174 186 139 199 211 164 224 236 — — —
40 113 178 190 138 203 215 163 228 240 188 253 265 213 278 290 Built-in One-touch
Clevis Pivot Bracket (mm) Fittings (mm)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 Bore size
Bore size (mm) LD LF LG LH LP LT LV LY P Q
LZ LZ LZ LZ LZ (mm)
20 6.8 15 30 30 37 3.2 18.4 59 177 202 227 — — 20 6 21.5
25 6.8 15 30 30 37 3.2 18.4 59 181 206 231 — — 25 6 24.5
32 9 15 40 40 50 4 28 75 199 224 249 274 — 32 6 27
40 9 15 40 40 50 4 28 75 228 253 278 303 328 40 8 32.5
170
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod Type
Series CM2K
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order CJ1

Mounting style Cylinder stroke (mm) CJP
B Basic style T Head side trunnion style (Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 172.)
L Axial foot style E Clevis integrated style CJ2
F Rod side flange style BZ Boss-cut basic style Bore size Cushion
Nil Rubber bumper
G Head side flange style
FZ
Boss-cut rod side 20 20 mm
Air cushion
CM2
C Single clevis style flange style 25 25mm A
D Double clevis style
UZ
Boss-cut rod side 32 32 mm CG1
U Rod side trunnion style trunnion style 40 40 mm Made to Order
MB
CM2K L 40 150 A MB1
CA2
With auto switch CDM2K L 40 150 A M9BW
Number of CS1
With auto switch Rod boot auto switches
(Built-in magnet) Nil None Nil 2 pcs. CS2
J Nylon tarpaulin S 1 pc.
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model K Heat resistant tarpaulin n “n” pcs.
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto switch is
required, there is no need to enter the symbol for the
Auto switch
auto switch. Nil Without auto switch
(Example) CDM2KF32-100 ∗ For the applicable auto switch model, refer
to the table below.
Indicator

light

(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9N
5V, 12V IC circuit
M9B
Solid state switch
2-wire 12V —
Connector H7C
Relay,
Yes

PLC
3-wire (NPN) M9NW
3-wire (PNP) M9PW
Grommet M9BW
2-wire 12V —
3-wire —
Yes
(NPN equivalent)
Grommet
100V A93 —
No Yes No Yes No

Reed switch
100V, 200V B54 ∗∗ Relay,

Connector
12V — C73C
2-wire 24V
conduit A34A ∗∗
Yes
100V, 200V — Relay,

PLC
Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Grommet — — B59W D-쏔
1 m ······· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m ······· L (Example) M9NWL
∗ D-A9쏔V/M9쏔V/M9쏔WV and D-M9쏔A(V)L cannot be mounted.
∗ Do not indicate suffix “N” for no lead wire on D-A3쏔A/A44A/G39A/K39A models.
-X쏔
5 m ······· Z (Example) M9NWZ ∗∗ D-A3쏔A/A44A/G39A/K39A/B54/B64 cannot be mounted on bore sizes ø20 and Individual
None ······· N (Example) H7CN ø25 cylinder with air cushion. -X쏔
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1328 and 1329. Technical
∗ D-A9쏔/M9쏔/M9쏔W auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (However, auto switch mounting brackets are assembled when being shipped.) data
171
Series CM2K
Specifications
A cylinder which rod does not Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
rotate because of the hexagonal Rod non-rotating accuracy
rod shape. Type Pneumatic
Non-rotating accuracy Fluid Air
ø20, ø25 0.7 Cushion Rubber bumper
ø32, ø40 0.5 Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Can operate without Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
lubrication. Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
The same installation Ambient and fluid temperature

dimensions as the standard Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)
+1.4
cylinder. Stroke length tolerance 0mm
Auto switches can also be
Cusion Rubber bumper, Air cushion
mounted.
Rubber bumper 0.27 J 0.4 J 0.65 J 1.2 J
It can be installed with auto switches to Allowable
simplify the detection of the stroke position kinetic energy Air cushion 0.54 J 0.78 J 1.27 J 2.35 J
of the cylinder. (Effective cushion length (mm)) (11.0) (11.0) (11.0) (11.8)
JIS Symbol
Double acting,
Standard Stroke Rod Boot Material
Single rod Symbol Rod boot material
Bore size Standard stroke Note)
(mm) (mm) J Nylon tarpaulin

K Heat resistant tarpaulin ∗
20
25 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150 ∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod
200, 250, 300 boot itself.
32
40
Note 1) Other intermediate strokes can be manufactured
upon receipt of order.
Made to Order Specifications Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm
(For details, refer to pages 1373 to 1498.) intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
Note 2) The maximum limit is 1000 stroke, but the prod-
Symbol Specifications ucts that exceed the standard stroke might not
be able to fulfill the specifications.
—XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (150 )
—XB12 External stainless steel cylinder
—XC3 Special port location Mounting Bracket/Part No.
—XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel Min. Bore size (mm)
—XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extention type 20 25 32 40
—XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type Axial foot ∗ 2 CM-L020B CM-L032B CM-L040B 2 foot, 1 mounting nut
—XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type Flange 1 CM-F020B CM-F032B CM-F040B 1 flange
—XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type Single clevis∗ ∗ 1 CM-C020B CM-C032B CM-C040B 1 single clevis, 3 liners
∗∗ 1 double clevis, 3 liners,
—XC13 Auto switch mounting rail style Double clevis ∗ ∗ ∗
—XC20 Head cover axial port 1 clevis pins, 2 retaining rings
—XC22 Fluororubber seals Trunnion (with nuts) 1 CM-T020B CM-T032B CM-T040B 1 trunnion, 1 trunnion nut
—XC25 No fixed orifice of connecting port ∗ Order 2 foot brackets for each cylinder unit.
Boss-cut style
Boss for the head side cover bracket is
eliminated and the total length of cylinder
is shortened.
Refer to pages 214 to 218 for cylinders with Comparison of the Full Length Dimension (Versus standard type) (mm)
auto switches.

(detection at stroke end) and mounting height
Mounting style
Operating range
Switch mounting bracket: Part no. 쐽 Boss-cut basic style (BZ) 쐽 Boss-cut flange style (FZ)
쐽 Boss-cut trunnion style (UZ)
172
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Road Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CM2K
20-CM2K Mounting style Bore size Stroke Precautions

Copper/fluorine-free Be sure to read before handling.
The type which prevents copper based ions from generating by Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for
changing the copper based materials into electroless nickel Safety Instructions and pages 3 to
the effects by copper based ions or fluororesins over the color
cathode ray tube. Precautions.
CJ1
CJP
Warning
If a cover is rotated when installing a cylinder or CJ2
screwing a fitting into the port, it is likely to damage
the junction part with cover.
Specifications 2. Do not operate with the cushion needle in a fully CM2
closed condition.
Action Double acting, Single rod Using it in the fully closed state will cause the
Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40 cushion seal to be damaged. When adjusting the CG1
cushion needle, use the “Hexagon wrench key:
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa nominal size 1.5”.
Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa 3. Do not open the cushion needle wide
MB
Cushion Rubber bumper excessively.
If the cushion needle were set to be completely
Piston speed 50 to 500 mm/s wide (more than 3 turns from fully closed), it would MB1
Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style, be equivalent to the cylinder with no cushion, thus
Head side flange style, Single clevis style, Double clevis making the impacts extremely high. Do not use it in
Mounting
style, Head side trunnion style, Rod side trunnion style, such a way. Besides, using with fully open could CA2
Clevis integrated style, Boss-cut style give damage to the piston or cover.
CS1
Mounting Style and Accessory Caution
Accessory Standard equipment Option 1. Avoid using the air cylinder in such a way that CS2
rotational torque would be applied to the piston
Mounting Rod end Clevis knuckle knuckle Clevis rod.
Mounting Rod boot
nut nut pin joint joint bracket If rotational torque is applied, the non-rotating guide
Basic style will become deformed, thus affecting the non-
rotating accuracy.
Axial foot style Refer to the table below for the approximate values
Rod side flange style of the allowable range of rotational torque.
Head side flange style ø20 ø25 ø32 ø40
(1) Allowable rotational torque
(1) (N·m or less) 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.44
Single clevis style
Double clevis style (3)
(1) (5) To screw a bracket or a nut onto the threaded
(2)
portion at the tip of the piston rod, make sure to
Rod side trunnion style retract the piston rod entirely, and place a wrench
(2) over the flat portion of the rod that protrudes.
Boss-cut basic style Tighten it by giving consideration to prevent the
tightening torque from being applied to the non-
Boss-cut flange style rotating guide.
Note 1) Mounting nuts are not attached for clevis integrated style, single clevis, and
double clevis styles.
Note 2) Trunnion nuts are attached for rod side trunnion and head side trunnion styles.
double clevis and double knuckle joint.
Note 4) Pin and retaining ring are shipped together with clevis pivot bracket.
Note 5) Clevis pins come with retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40).
Mass (kg) 2. When replacing rod seals, please contact SMC.
Air leakage may be happened, depending on the
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 position in which a rod seal is fitted. Thus, please
Basic style 0.14 0.21 0.28 0.57 contact SMC when replacing them.
Axial foot style 0.29 0.37 0.44 0.84 3. Not able to disassemble.
Flange style 0.20 0.30 0.37 0.69 Cover and cylinder tube are connected to each
other by caulking method, thus making it impossible
Clevis integrated style 0.12 0.19 0.27 0.53 to disassemble. Therefore, internal parts of a
Basic Single clevis style 0.18 0.25 0.32 0.66 cylinder other than rod seal are not replaceable.
mass Double clevis style 0.19 0.27 0.33 0.70 4. Do not touch the cylinder during operation.
Use caution when handling a cylinder, which is
Trunnion style 0.18 0.28 0.34 0.67 running at a high speed and a high frequency,
Boss-cut basic style 0.13 0.19 0.26 0.53 because the surface of a cylinder tube could get so
Boss-cut flange style 0.19 0.28 0.35 0.66 hot enough as to cause you get burned.
Boss-cut trunnion style 0.17 0.26 0.32 0.63 5. Combine the rod end section, so that a rod boot
might not be twisted.
Additional mass per each 50 mm of stroke 0.04 0.07 0.09 0.14 If a rod boot is installed with being twisted when
Clevis bracket (With pin) 0.07 0.07 0.14 0.14 installing a cylinder, it will cause a rod boot to fail D-쏔
Option during operation.
Single knuckle joint 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.23
bracket
Double knuckle joint (With pin) 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.20 -X쏔
Calculation: (Example) CM2KL32-100 Individual
앫 Basic mass···············0.44 (Foot style, ø32)
-X쏔
앫 Additional mass········0.09/0.50 stroke
앫 Cylinder stroke········· 100 stroke Technical
0.44 + 0.09 x 100/50 = 0.62 kg data
173
Series CM2K
Construction
Rubber bumper
Boss-cut style Clevis integrated style
Rod section
With air cushion
Rod section
Component Parts
1 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 12 Retaining ring Stainless steel
2A Head cover A Aluminum alloy Clear anodized ∗ 13 Piston seal NBR
2B Head cover B Aluminum alloy Clear anodized ∗∗ 14 Piston gasket NBR
2C Head cover C Aluminum alloy Clear anodized ∗∗∗ 15 Wear ring Resin
3 Cylinder tube Stainless steel 16 Mounting nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
4 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 17 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
5 Piston rod Stainless steel
Non-rotating guide Copper oil-impregnated
6 sintered alloy Replacement Part: Seal
7 Seal retainer Carbon steel Nickel plated With rubber bumper / With air cushion
9 Clevis bushing Copper oil-impregnated 20 25 32 40
sintered alloy
18 Rod seal NBR PDR-8W PDR-10W PDR-12W PDR-14W
10 Bumper A Urethane
11 Bumper B Urethane Grease pack part no.: GR-S-010 (10 g)
∗ Basic style, ∗∗ Boss-cut style, ∗∗∗ Clevis integrated style
174
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Road Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CM2K
Basic Style (B)
CM2KB Bore size Stroke
Width across flats B2 H2 G 2 x RcP G 2 x NN

Width across flats B1 H1 øI
2 x øEh8
NA
Effective
MM AL
thread length
NA
CJ1
2 x FL
Width across flats KB A F N N
H S + Stroke F CJP
ZZ + Stroke
CJ2
With rod boot Boss-cut style CM2

8 l 8
Width across flats B3 CG1
MB
øe
JH
MB1
ZZ + Stroke
f
h JW CA2
ZZ + Stroke
CS1
With air cushion CS2
(Width across flats 1.5) (Width across flats 1.5)
45°
WA WA 45°
N1 N1
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 B2 E F FL G H H1 H2 I KB MM N NA NN P S ZZ
0 1
20 18 15.5 13 26 20–0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 8.2 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 8 62 116
0 1
25 22 19.5 17 32 26–0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 10.2 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 8 62 120
0 1
32 22 19.5 17 32 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 12.2 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 8 64 122
0 1
40 24 21 22 41 32–0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 14.2 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 4 88 154
With Rod Boot (mm)

Symbol
h l ZZ
Bore
Stro
ke B3 e f JH JW
size (mm) 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300
20 30 36 18 68 81 93 106 131 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 143 156 168 181 206 23.5 10.5
25 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 147 160 172 185 210 23.5 10.5
32 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 149 162 174 187 212 23.5 10.5
40 41 46 20 77 90 102 115 140 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 181 194 206 219 244 27 10.5
Boss-cut Style (mm) With Air Cushion (mm)

ZZ Bore size (mm) N1 WA
Bore size
Without With rod boot 20 17.5 13
(mm)
rod boot 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 25 17.5 13
20 103 130 143 155 168 193 32 17.5 13
25 107 134 147 159 172 197 40 21.5 16
32 109 136 149 161 174 199
40 138 165 178 190 203 228
D-쏔
-X쏔
Dimensions of Each Mounting Bracket Individual
The dimensions are the same as standard type, double acting, single rod, except the configuration of the piston rod. Refer to pages 136 to 143. Specifications for the -X쏔
auto switch equipped type are the same as Series CDM2 standard type.
Technical
data
175
Double Acting, Double Rod
Series CM2KW
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order

Mounting style (Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 177.)
B Basic style
Cushion
L Axial foot style
Nil Rubber bumper
F Flange style
A Air cushion
U Trunnion style
Made to Order
CM2KW L 40 150 A
With auto switch CDM2KW L 40 150 A M9BW
With auto switch Number of
Bore size auto switches
(Built-in magnet)
20 20 mm Nil 2 pcs.
Non-rotating rod type 25 25 mm S 1 pc.
32 32 mm n “n” pcs.
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto switch is Auto switch

required, there is no need to enter the symbol for the Nil Without auto switch
auto switch. ∗ For the applicable auto switch model,
(Example) CDM2KWF32-100 refer to the table below.
Indicator

light

(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9N
5V, 12V IC circuit
M9B
Solid state switch
2-wire 12V —
Connector H7C
Relay,
Yes

PLC
3-wire (NPN) M9NW
3-wire (PNP) M9PW
Grommet M9BW
2-wire 12V —
3-wire —
Yes
(NPN equivalent)
Grommet
100V A93 —
No Yes No Yes No

Reed switch
100V, 200V B54 ∗∗ Relay,

Connector
12V — C73C
2-wire 24V
conduit A34A ∗∗
Yes
100V, 200V — Relay,

PLC
176
Double Acting, Double Rod Series CM2KW
Specifications
rod shape. Action Pneumatic
Non-rotating accuracy Action Double acting, Double rod
ø20, ø25—±0.7° Fluid Air
ø32, ø40—±0.5° Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Can operate without Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa CJ1
lubrication. Minimum operating pressure 0.08 MPa
Without auto switch: –10 to +70°C (No freezing) CJP
The same installation With auto switch: –10 to +60°C (No freezing)

+1.4
CJ2
cylinder. Stroke length tolerance mm
0

Piston speed 50 to 500 mm/s CM2
Allowable kinetic energy 0.27 J 0.4 J 0.65 J 1.2 J
mounted.
It can be installed with auto switches to
CG1
simplify the detection of the stroke position Standard Stroke
of the cylinder. MB
Bore size Standard stroke Note) Accessory Bracket
(mm) (mm)
Refer to pages 144 and 145 for MB1
JIS Symbol accessory bracket, since it is the same
20
Double acting,
Double rod 25 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
as standard type, double acting, single
rod.
CA2
32 200, 250, 300
40
CS1
Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. CS2
Note 2) The maximum limit is 500 stroke, but the products that exceed the
standard stroke might not be able to fulfill the specifications.
—XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (150 )
(2)
—XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel Mounting Rod end Single knuckle Double knuckle
—XC13 Auto switch mounting rail style Mounting nut nut joint joint
—XC22 Fluororubber seals Basic style (1 pc.) (2 pcs.)
—XC52 Mounting nut with set screw Axial foot style (2) (2)
Flange style (1) (2)
Trunnion style (1) (1) (2)
Note 1) Trunnion nuts are attached for trunnion style.
double knuckle joint.

Proper auto switch mounting position (detection at stroke end) and mounting height
Operating range
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
177
Series CM2KW
Mass (kg)
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Basic style 0.16 0.25 0.32 0.66
Precautions
Basic Axial foot style 0.31 0.41 0.48 0.93 Be sure to read before handling. Refer
mass Flange style 0.22 0.34 0.41 0.78 to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety
Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for
Trunnion style 0.20 0.32 0.38 0.76 Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Additional mass per each 50 mm of stroke 0.06 0.1 0.14 0.20
Option Single knuckle joint 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.23 Operating Precautions
bracket Double knuckle joint (With pin) 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.20 Warning
Calculation: (Example) CM2KWL32-100 1. Do not rotate the cover.
앫 Basic mass 0.48 (Foot, ø32) If a cover is rotated when installing a cylinder
앫 Additional mass 0.14/50 st or screwing a fitting into the port, it is likely to
damage the junction part with cover.
앫 Cylinder stroke: 100 st
0.48 + 0.14 x 100/50 = 0.76 kg 2. Do not operate with the cushion needle in
a fully closed condition.
Using it in the fully closed state will cause the
cushion seal to be damaged. When adjusting
the cushion needle, use the “Hexagon wrench
Mounting Bracket/Part No. key: nominal size 1.5”.
Min. Bore size (mm) 3. Do not open the cushion needle wide
Mounting bracket order Description (for min. order) excessively.
20 25 32 40
If the cushion needle were set to be completely
Axial foot ∗ 2 CM-L020B CM-L032B CM-L040B 2 foot, 1 mounting nut wide (more than 3 turns from fully closed), it
Flange 1 CM-F020B CM-F032B CM-F040B 1 flange would be equivalent to the cylinder with no
Trunnion (with nuts) cushion, thus making the impacts extremely
1 CM-T020B CM-T032B CM-T040B 1 trunnion, 1 trunnion nut
high. Do not use it in such a way. Besides,
∗ Order 2 foot brackets for each cylinder unit. using with fully open could give damage to the
piston or cover.
Caution
1. Avoid using the air cylinder in such a way
that rotational torque would be applied to
the piston rod.
If rotational torque is applied, the non-
rotating guide will become deformed, thus
affecting the non-rotating accuracy.
Refer to the table below for the approximate
values of the allowable range of rotational
torque.
Allowable rotational torque ø20 ø25 ø32 ø40
(N·m or less) 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.44
To screw a bracket or a nut onto the
threaded portion at the tip of the piston rod,
make sure to retract the piston rod entirely,
and place a wrench over the flat portion of
the rod that protrudes.
Tighten it by giving consideration to prevent
the tightening torque from being applied to
the non-rotating guide.
2. When replacing rod seals, please contact

SMC.
Air leakage may be happened, depending on
the position in which a rod seal is fitted. Thus,
please contact SMC when replacing them.
Cover and cylinder tube are connected to
each other by caulking method, thus making
it impossible to disassemble. Therefore,
internal parts of a cylinder other than rod
4. Do not touch the cylinder during operation.
Use caution when handling a cylinder, which
is running at a high speed and a high
frequency, because the surface of a cylinder
tube could get so hot enough as to cause
you get burned.
5. Combine the rod end section, so that a
rod boot might not be twisted.
boot to fail during operation.
178
Double Acting, Double Rod Series CM2KW
With Air Cushion Copper/Fluorine-free
CM2KW Mounting style Bore size Stroke A Rod boot 20-CM2KW Mounting style Bore size Stroke
With air cushion Copper/fluorine-free
The cushion mechanism is provided for covers in both sides to The type which prevents copper based ions from generating by
absorb the impacts when operating at a high speed, thus giving changing the copper based materials into electroless nickel
no vibrations to a surrounding area and a long service life plated treatment or non-copper materials in order to eliminate
brought to cylinder. the effects by copper based ions or fluororesins over the color
CJ1
Refer to page 147 for the specifications and allowable kinetic energy Refer to page 147 for the specifications since this cylinder has the
since this cylinder has the same specification as the double acting same specification as the double acting double rod model.
double rod model. CJP
CJ2
Construction
CM2
Rubber bumper CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
CS1
CS2
Rod section
With air cushion
Rod section

No. Description Material Note With Rubber Bumper, With Air Cushion, Built-in One-touch Fittings
1 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized Bore size (mm)
2 Cylinder tube Stainless steel 20 25 32 40
3 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 17 Rod seal A NBR PDU-8Z PDU-12LZ PDU-14LZ
PDU-10Z
4 Piston rod A Carbon steel Hard chrome plated
5 Piston rod B Stainless steel 18 Rod seal B NBR PDR-8W PDR-10W PDR-12W PDR-14W
7 Non-rotating guide Copper oil-impregnated sintered alloy Grease pack part no.: GR-S-010 (10 g)
8 Seal retainer A Stainless steel
9 Seal retainer B Carbon steel Nickel plated
10 Retaining ring Carbon steel Phosphate coated
11 Bumper A Urethane D-쏔
12 Bumper B Urethane
13 Piston seal NBR -X쏔
14 Piston gasket NBR Individual
15 mounting nut Carbon steel Nickel plated -X쏔
16 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated Technical
data
179
Series CM2KW
Basic Style (B)
CM2KWB Bore size Stroke
Width across flats B2 H2 G 2 x RcP G 2 x NN Width across flats KB

Width across flats B1 H1 MM
øI
2 x øEh8
NA
øD
MM
Effective thread length
Width across flats KA AL 2 x FL AL
A K F N N F A NA
ZZ + 2 x Stroke

(Width across flats 1.5) Cushion needle
45° (Width across flats 1.5)
WA WA 45°
N N
(mm)
Bore size A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 H2 I K KA KB MM N NA NN P S ZZ
0 1
20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20 – 0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 8.2 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 8 62 144
0 1
25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 – 0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 10.2 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 8 62 152
0 1
32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 – 0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 12.2 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 8 64 154
0 1
40 24 21 22 41 14 32 – 0.033 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 14.2 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 4 88 188
With Air Cushion (mm)

Bore size N WA
20 17.5 13
25 17.5 13
32 17.5 13
40 21.5 16
Dimensions of Each Mounting Bracket

External dimensions of each mounting bracket other than basic style are the same as standard type, double acting, double rod (except KA dimensions). Refer
to pages 153 to 155.
180
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend
Series CM2K
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order CJ1

Mounting style
Basic style
Cylinder stroke (mm) CJP
B T Head side trunnion style (Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 182.)
L Axial foot style E Clevis integrated style
CJ2
F Rod side flange style BZ Boss-cut basic style Action
Single clevis style
FZ
Boss-cut rod side
flange style
S Single acting, Spring return CM2
C T Single acting, Spring extend
UZ
Boss-cut rod side
trunnion style
CG1
MB
CM2K L 32 150 S MB1
CA2
With auto switch CDM2K L 32 150 S M9BW
Number of CS1
With auto switch auto switches
(Built-in magnet) Bore size CS2
Nil 2 pcs.
20 20 mm 1 pc.
S
n “n” pcs.
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto 32 32 mm
switch is required, there is no need to enter 40 40 mm Auto switch
the symbol for the auto switch. Nil Without auto switch
(Example) CDM2KF32-100T ∗ For the applicable auto switch model,
refer to the table below.
Indicator

light

(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9N
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
M9B
Solid state switch
2-wire 12 V —
Connector H7C
Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V G39A IC circuit
Relay,
Yes
conduit 2-wire 24 V 12 V — K39A —

PLC
3-wire (NPN) M9NW
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PW
Grommet M9BW
2-wire 12 V —
With diagnostic output (2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V H7NF IC circuit
3-wire IC circuit
— 5V — A96
Yes
(NPN equivalent) —
Grommet
100 V A93 —
No Yes No Yes No
100 V or less A90 IC circuit

Reed switch
100 V, 200 V B54 Relay,

200 V or less B64 — PLC
Connector
12 V — C73C
2-wire 24 V
24 V or less C80C IC circuit
conduit A34A
Yes
100 V, 200 V — Relay,

DIN terminal A44A
PLC
∗ D-A9쏔V쏔/M9쏔V쏔/M9쏔WV쏔 and D-M9쏔A(V)L cannot be mounted.
-X쏔
5 m ······· Z (Example) M9NWZ Individual
None ······· N (Example) H7CN -X쏔
181
Series CM2K
Specifications
rod shape. Action Spring acting, Spring return/Spring extend
Fluid Air
Non-rotating accuracy Cushion Rubber bumper
ø20, ø25 0.7 Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
ø32, ø40 0.5 Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Can operate without Minimum Spring return 0.18 MPa
lubrication. operating pressure
Spring extend 0.23 MPa
The same installation Ambient and fluid temperature
cylinder. Stroke length tolerance +1.4
0 mm

mounted.
It can be installed with auto switches to
simplify the detection of the stroke position Standard Stroke
of the cylinder. Note)
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm)
20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
JIS Symbol
Single acting, 25 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
Spring return Spring extend 32 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200
40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250
Note 2) Please contact SMC for longer strokes.
Mounting Bracket Part No.

Made to Order Specifications Min. Bore size (mm)
(For details, refer to pages 1395 to 1498.) Mounting bracket order Description (for min. order)
20 25 32 40
Symbol Specifications Axial foot ∗ 2 CM-L020B CM-L032B CM-L040B 2 foot, 1 mounting nut
—XB12 External stainless steel cylinder Flange 1 CM-F020B CM-F032B CM-F040B 1 flange
—XC3 Special port location Single clevis∗ ∗ 1 CM-C020B CM-C032B CM-C040B 1 single clevis, 3 liners
∗∗ 1 double clevis, 3 liners,
Double clevis∗ ∗ ∗
—XC13 Auto switch mounting rail style 1 clevis pin, 2 retaining rings
—XC20 Head cover axial port Trunnion (with nuts) 1 CM-T020B CM-T032B CM-T040B 1 trunnion, 1 trunnion nut
—XC27 Double clevis pin and double knuckle pin ∗ Order 2 foot brackets for each cylinder unit.
made of stainless steel
—XC52 Mounting nut with set screw ∗∗ 3 Liners are attached with a clevis bracket for adjusting the mounting angle.
Theoretical Output Spring Reaction Force

Refer to “Theoretical Output 1” on page 1573. Refer to “Spring Reaction Force 3” on page 1570.
Precautions
Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for Boss-cut style
Safety Instructions and pages 3 to
11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Boss for the head side cover bracket is
Precautions. eliminated and the total length of cylinder is
shortened.
Refer to pages 214 to 218 for cylinders with

auto switches.
Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting Comparison of the Full Length Dimension Mounting style
(Versus standard type) (mm) 쐽 Boss-cut basic style (BZ)
(detection at stroke end) and mounting height
Operating range 쐽 Boss-cut flange style (FZ)
Switch mounting bracket: Part no. 쐽 Boss-cut trunnion style (UZ)
182
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend Series CM2K
Mounting Rod end Clevis Clevis

knuckle knuckle
Mounting nut nut pin joint joint bracket
Basic style
Axial foot style
CJ1
Clevis integrated style (1)
Single clevis style (1) CJP

(3) (1) (5)
Double clevis style
Rod side trunnion style (2)
CJ2
CM2
(2)
Boss-cut basic style
Boss-cut flange style CG1
Note 1) Mounting nuts are not attached for clevis integrated style, single clevis, and double clevis
MB
styles.
Note 2) Trunnion nuts are attached for rod side trunnion and head side trunnion styles. MB1
Note 3) Pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for bore size ø40) are shipped together with double
clevis and double knuckle joint.
Note 4) Pin and retaining ring are shipped together with clevis pivot bracket. CA2
Note 5) Clevis pins come with retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40).
CS1
Mass
CS2
Spring Return/( ): Denotes Spring Extend. (kg)
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
25 stroke 0.20 (0.19) 0.31 (0.30) 0.43 (0.41) 0.78 (0.75)
50 stroke 0.23 (0.21) 0.34 (0.33) 0.48 (0.45) 0.86 (0.83)
75 stroke 0.29 (0.25) 0.43 (0.41) 0.61 (0.56) 1.08 (0.99)
Basic 100 stroke 0.31 (0.27) 0.47 (0.44) 0.66 (0.60) 1.14 (1.06)
mass 125 stroke 0.37 (0.32) 0.56 (0.52) 0.81 (0.72) 1.34 (1.23)
150 stroke 0.39 (0.34) 0.59 (0.55) 0.85 (0.76) 1.39 (1.31)
200 stroke — (—) — (—) 1.04 (0.92) 1.71 (1.54)
250 stroke — (—) — (—) — (—) 2.00 (1.78)
Foot style 0.15 (0.15) 0.16 (0.16) 0.16 (0.16) 0.27 (0.27)
Flange style 0.06 (0.06) 0.09 (0.09) 0.09 (0.09) 0.12 (0.12)
Single clevis style 0.04 (0.04) 0.04 (0.04) 0.04 (0.04) 0.09 (0.09)
Double clevis style 0.05 (0.05) 0.06 (0.06) 0.06 (0.06) 0.13 (0.13)
Mounting Trunnion style 0.04 (0.04) 0.07 (0.07) 0.07 (0.07) 0.10 (0.10)
bracket
mass Integral clevis style –0.02 (–0.02) –0.02 (–0.02) –0.01 (–0.01) –0.04 (–0.04)
Boss-cut basic style –0.01 (–0.01) –0.02 (–0.02) –0.02 (–0.02) –0.03 (–.03)
Boss-cut flange style 0.05 (0.05) 0.07 (0.07) 0.07 (0.07) 0.09 (0.09)
Boss-cut trunnion style 0.03 (0.03) 0.05 (0.05) 0.05 (0.05) 0.07 (0.07)
Clevis bracket (With pin) 0.07 (0.07) 0.07 (0.07) 0.14 (0.14) 0.14 (0.14)
Option Single knuckle joint 0.06 (0.06) 0.06 (0.06) 0.06 (0.06) 0.23 (0.23)
bracket Double knuckle joint (With pin) 0.07 (0.07) 0.07 (0.07) 0.07 (0.07) 0.20 (0.20)
Calculation:
(Example) CM2KL32-100S (Bore size ø32, Foot style, 100 stroke)
0.66 (Basic mass) + 0.16 (Mounting bracket mass) = 0.82 kg
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
183
Series CM2K
20-CM2K Mounting style Bore size Stroke Action
Copper/fluorine-free
The type which prevents copper based ions from generating by
changing the copper based materials into electroless nickel plated
treatment or non-copper materials in order to eliminate the effects by
copper based ions or fluororesins over the color cathode ray tube.
Specifications
Head side flange style, Single clevis style,
Mounting Double clevis style, Rod side trunnion style,
Head side trunnion style, Clevis integrated style,
Boss-cut style
Construction
Spring return
Rod section Boss-cut style Clevis integrated style
Spring extend
Rod section
Component Parts
1 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 12 Retaining ring Carbon steel Phosphate coated
2A Head cover A Aluminum alloy Clear anodized ∗ 13 Clevis bushing
Copper oil-impregnated
sintered alloy
2B Head cover B Aluminum alloy Clear anodized ∗∗ 14 Bumper Urethane
2C Head cover C Aluminum alloy Clear anodized ∗∗∗ 15 Bumper A Urethane
3 Cylinder tube Stainless steel 16 Bumper B Urethane
4 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 17 Retaining ring Stainless steel
5 Piston rod Stainless steel 18 Piston seal NBR
Copper oil-impregnated
6 Non-rotating guide sintered alloy 19 Piston gasket NBR
7 Seal retainer Carbon steel Nickel plated 20 Wear ring Resin
8 Return spring Steel wire Zinc chromated 21 Mounting nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
9 Spring guide Aluminum alloy Chromated 22 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
10 Spring seat Aluminum alloy Chromated Replacement Parts: Seal
11 Plug with fixed orifice Alloy steel Black zinc chromated Part no.
∗ Basic style, ∗∗ Boss-cut style, ∗∗∗ Clevis integrated style No. Description Material
20 25 32 40
*Since the seal kit does not include a grease pack, order it separately.
Grease pack part no.:GR-S-010(10g)
184
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend Series CM2K
Basic Style (B)
S
CM2KB Bore size Stroke T
Spring return
Width
Width across flats KB across
flats B2 H2 G Plug with fixed orifice G 2 x NN
RcP
øI
CJ1
2 x øEh8
NA
MM Effective thread length CJP
AL NA
2 x FL
A F N N
H S + Stroke F CJ2
ZZ + Stroke
CM2
CG1
Spring extend MB
MB1
CA2
Width across flats B2 H2 G RcP Plug with fixed orifice 2 x NN
Width across flats KB
Width across flats B1 H1 øI CS1
2 x øEh8
CS2
NA
Effective thread
MM length
AL
N 2 x FL NA
A F N
H + Stroke S + Stroke F
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Boss-cut style

(mm)
Bore size A AL B1 B2 E F FL G H H1 H2 I KB MM N NA NN P
0 1
20 18 15.5 13 26 20 – 0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 8.2 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 8
0 1
25 22 19.5 17 32 26 – 0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 10.2 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 8
0 1
32 22 19.5 17 32 26 – 0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 12.2 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 8
0 1
40 24 21 22 41 32 – 0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 14.2 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 4

Stroke Stroke
Sym
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 Sym
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
bol bol
Bore size S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ Bore size ZZ ZZ ZZ ZZ ZZ
20 87 141 112 166 137 191 — — — — 20 128 153 178 — —
25 87 145 112 170 137 195 — — — — 25 132 157 182 — —
32 89 147 114 172 139 197 164 222 — — 32 134 159 184 209 —
40 113 179 138 204 163 229 188 254 213 279 40 163 188 213 238 263
D-쏔
-X쏔
External dimensions of each mounting bracket other than basic style are the same as standard
type, single acting, spring return/spring extend (except piston rod configuration). Refer to pages Individual
163 to 170. -X쏔
Specifications with auto switch are the same as standard type (CDM2- 쏔S/T).
Technical
data
185
Air Cylinder: Direct Mount Type
Series CM2R
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order
Cylinder stroke (mm) Cushion
(Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 187.) Nil Rubber bumper
Type A Air cushion
Nil Pneumatic ∗ Air-hydro cylinder: Rubber
bumper only
H Air-hydro
Made to Order
CM2 R A 20 100 A
With auto switch CDM2 R A 20 100 A M9BW
Mounting style Number of
auto switches
With auto switch A Bottom mounting style
Nil 2 pcs.
(Built-in magnet) B Front mounting style
S 1 pc.
Bore size n “n” pcs.

Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model 20 20 mm Auto switch
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto switch is 25 25 mm Nil Without auto switch
required, there is no need to enter the symbol for the 32 32 mm ∗ For the applicable auto switch model,
auto switch. refer to the table below.
40 40 mm
(Example) CDM2RB32-100
Indicator

light

(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9N
5V, 12V IC circuit
M9B
Solid state switch
2-wire 12V —
Connector H7C
Relay,
Yes

PLC
3-wire (NPN) M9NW
3-wire (PNP) M9PW
Grommet M9BW
2-wire 12V —
3-wire — —
— 5V A96 IC circuit
Yes
(NPN equivalent)
Grommet
100V A93 —
No Yes No Yes No

Reed switch
100V, 200V B54 ∗∗ Relay,

Connector
12V — C73C
2-wire 24V
conduit A34A ∗∗
Yes
100V, 200V
— Relay,
PLC
186
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CM2R
Series CM2R direct mount Specifications
cylinder can be installed Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
directly through the use of a Action Double acting, Single rod
square rod cover. Fluid Air

Space saving has been realized. Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Because it is a directly mounted style
without using brackets, its overall length is Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
shorter, and its installation pitch can be Ambient and fluid temperature Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing)
With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing)
made smaller. Thus, the space that is
required for installation has been Lubrication Not required (Non-lube) CJ1
dramatically reduced. Stroke length tolerance +1.4
0 mm
Improved installation Piston speed Rubber bumper: 50 to 750 mm/s, Air cusion: 50 to 1000 mm/s
CJP
accuracy and strength Cushion Rubber bumper, Air cushion
A centering boss has been provided to CJ2
improve the installation accuracy. Also, Rubber bumper 0.27 J 0.4 J 0.65 J 1.2 J
Allowable
because it is the directly mounted style, kinetic energy Air cushion 0.54 J 0.78 J 1.27 J 2.35 J CM2
the strength has been increased. (Effective cushion length (mm)) (11.0) (11.0) (11.0) (11.8)
Two styles of installation CG1
Two styles of installations are available
and can be selected according to the
purpose: the front mounting style or the Standard Stroke MB
bottom mounting style. Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) (1) Maximum manufacturable stroke (mm)(2)
20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150 1000 MB1
25 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 1500
32 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 2000
CA2
40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300 2000
CS1
(Spacers are not used.) CS2
Note 2) Refer to next page for Precations.
Bottom mounting style Front mounting style

Tightening Torque: Tighten the cylinder mounting bolts for the bottom mounting
Style (Series CM2RA) with the following tightening torque.
Bore size (mm) Hexagon socket head cap screw size Tightening torque(N m)
20 M5 x 0.8 2.4 to 3.6
JIS Symbol
Double acting 25 M6 4.2 to 6.2
32 M8 10.0 to 15.0
40 M10 19.6 to 29.4

Operating range
Made to Order Specifications Switch mounting bracket: Part no.
—XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (150°C)
—XB7 Cold resistant cylinder
—XB9 Low speed cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s)
—XC5 Heat resistant cylinder (110°C)
—XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type
—XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type D-쏔
—XC12 Tandem cylinder
—XC13 Auto switch mounting rail style -X쏔
—XC20 Head cover axial port Individual
—XC22 Fluororubber seals -X쏔
—XC25 No fixed orifice of connecting port Technical
—XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin data
187
Series CM2R
Accessory
Mounting Rod end nut Single knuckle joint Double knuckle joint (With pin) ∗
Bottom mounting style
Front mounting style
∗ Knuckle pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for ø40) are shipped together.
Mass (kg)
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 Calculation: (Example)CM2RA32-100
(ø32, 100 stroke, Bottom mounting)
Bottom mounting style 0.14 0.23 0.32 0.62
Basic mass Basic mass··················0.32kg
Front mounting style 0.14 0.22 0.32 0.61 Additional mass···········0.08kg
Cylinder stroke············100mm
0.32 + 0.08 x 100/50 = 0.48kg
Clean Series
Precautions 10-CM2R Mounting style Bore size Stroke
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front Clean Series (with relief port)
matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions and pages The type which is applicable for using inside the clean room
3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions. graded Class 100 by making an actuator’s rod section a double
seal construction and discharging by relief port directly to the
outside of clean room.
Warning
If a cover is rotated when installing a cylinder or screwing a
fitting into the port, it is likely to damage the junction part with
cover. Specifications
2. Do not operate with the cushion needle in a fully closed Action Double acting, Single rod
condition.
Using it in the fully closed state will cause the cushion seal to Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
be damaged. When adjusting the cushion needle, use the Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
“Hexagon wrench key: nominal size 1.5”.
3. Do not open the cushion needle wide excessively.
If the cushion needle were set to be completely wide (more Cushion Rubber bumper (Standard equipment)
than 3 turns from fully closed), it would be equivalent to the Relief port size M5 x 0.8
cylinder with no cushion, thus making the impacts extremely
high. Do not use it in such a way. Besides, using with fully open Piston speed 30 to 400 mm/s
could give damage to the piston or cover. Mounting Bottom mounting style, Front mounting style
4. In the case of exceeding the standard stroke length, ∗ Auto switch can be mounted.
implement an intermediate support.
When using cylinder with longer stroke, implement an Construction
intermediate support for preventing the joint of rod cover and
cylinder tube from being broken by vibration or external load.
Caution
Cover and cylinder tube are connected to each other by
caulking method, thus making it impossible to disassemble.
Therefore, internal parts of a cylinder other than rod seal are
not replaceable. Front mounting style Bottom mounting style
2. Use caution to the popping of a retaining ring.
When replacing rod seals and removing and mounting a
retaining ring, use a proper tool (retaining ring plier: tool for
installing a type C retaining ring). Even if a proper tool is used,
it is likely to inflict damage to a human body or peripheral M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8
equipment, as a retaining ring may be flown out of the tip of a Relief port GC Relief port GC
plier. Be much careful with the popping of a retaining ring. (mm)
Besides, be certain that a retaining ring is placed firmly into
the groove of rod cover before supplying air at the time of Bore size (mm) GC
installment. 20 6
3. Do not touch the cylinder during operation. 25 6
Use caution when handling a cylinder, which is running at a 32 7
high speed and a high frequency, because the surface of a 40 9
cylinder tube could get so hot enough as to cause you get
burned. For details, refer to the separate catalog, “Pneumatic Clean Series”.
4. Do not use an air cylinder as an air-hydro cylinder.
If it uses turbine oil in place of fluids for cylinder, it may result
in oil leakage.
188
Air-hydro Copper/Fluorine-free
CM2HR Mounting style Bore size Stroke 20-CM2R Mounting style Bore size Stroke
Air-hydro Copper/fluorine-free
A low hydraulic pressure cylinder used at a pressures of 1.0 The type which prevents copper based ions from generating by
MPa or below. changing the copper based materials into electroless nickel
Through the concurrent use of a CC series air-hydro unit, it is plated treatment or non-copper materials in order to eliminate
possible to operate at a constant or low speeds or to effect an the effects by copper based ions or fluororesins over the color
intermediate stop, just like a hydraulic unit, while using cathode ray tube. CJ1
pneumatic equipment such as a valve.
CJP
CJ2
CM2
Type Air-hydro
CG1
Fluid Turbine oil
Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40 MB
Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa MB1
Piston speed 50 to 750 mm/s CA2
Cushion Rubber bumper Mounting
Bottom mounting style CS1
Front mounting style
Thread tolerance +1.4 ∗ Auto switch can be mounted. CS2
0 mm
Stroke length tolerance
Mounting Bottom mounting style, Front mounting style
∗ Auto switches can be mounted. Dimensions are the same as the standard
type of Series CM2R.
For construction, refer to page 190.

Since the dimensions of mounting style is the same as pages 191and 192, refer
to those pages.
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
189
Series CM2R
Construction
Rubber bumper
Air-hydro
With air cushion

No. Description Material Note 쎲 With Rubber Bumper, With Air Cushion
1 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized Part no.
2 Head cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 20 25 32 40
3 Cylinder tube Stainless steel Rod seal NBR PDU-8Z PDU-10Z PDU-12LZ PDU-14LZ
16
쎲 Air-hydro
Part no.
6 Bushing Copper oil-impregnated sintered alloy No. Description Material
20 25 32 40
7 Seal retainer Stainless steel
8 Retaining ring Carbon steel Phosphate coated 16 Rod seal NBR HDU-8 HDU-10 HDU-12L HDU-14
9 Bumper A Urethane
10 Bumper B Urethane Grease pack part no.: GR-S-010 (10 g)
11 Retaining ring Stainless steel
12 Piston seal NBR
14 Wear ring Resin
For proper auto switch mounting position (at stroke end), refer to pages 215
to 217, since the operating range is the same as standard type, single rod.
190
Bottom Mounting Style
CM2RA Bore size Stroke
X
GA 2 x RcP
2 x øLD Width across flats B1 Y GB
MM H1
øI
CJ1
øD
øND
B
CJP
N
LH
Width across
LX flats KA AL CJ2
L A K NA NB
H S + Stroke N CM2
ZZ + Stroke
CG1
With air cushion
MB
MB1
(Width across flats 1.5) (Width across flats 1.5)
13° CA2
W WA 45°
WB
CS1
CS2
NB
NA
(mm)
Bore size Stroke range
20 1 to 150
25 1 to 200
32 1 to 200
40 1 to 300
(mm)
Bore size A AL B B1 D GA GB H H1 I K KA L LD LH LX MM N NA NB ND P S X Y ZZ
ø5.5, ø9.5 counterbore 0 1
20 18 15.5 30.3 13 8 22 8 27 5 28 5 6 33.5 depth 6.5 15 21 M8 x 1.25 24 29 15 20 – 0.033 8 76 39 12 103
ø6.6, ø11 counterbore 0 1
25 22 19.5 36.3 17 10 22 8 31 6 33.5 5.5 8 39 depth 7.5 18 25 M10 x 1.25 30 29 15 26 – 0.033 8 76 43 12 107
ø9, ø14 counterbore 0 1
32 22 19.5 42.3 17 12 22 8 31 6 37.5 5.5 10 47 depth 10 21 30 M10 x 1.25 34.5 29 15 26 – 0.033 8 78 43 12 109
ø11, ø17.5 counterbore 0
40 24 21 52.3 22 14 27 11 34 8 46.5 7 12 58.5 depth 12.5 26 38 M14 x 1.5 42.5 37.5 21.5 32 – 0.039 1 4 104 49 15 138

Bore size NA NB WA WB W
20 31.5 17.5 27 13 8.5
25 31.5 17.5 27 13 10.5
32 31.5 17.5 27 13 11.5
40 37.5 21.5 32 16 15
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
191
Series CM2R
Front Mounting Style
CM2RB Bore size Stroke
Width across
4 x FF flats B1 GA 2 x RcP GB
MM H1 øI
øD
FX
øND
F
N
Width across
flats KA
FX AL
A K NA NB
F
S + Stroke N
H
ZZ + Stroke
With air cushion

13° (Width across flats 1.5) (Width across flats 1.5)
W WA 45°
WB
NB
NA
(mm)
20 1 to 150
25 1 to 200
32 1 to 200
40 1 to 300
(mm)
Bore size A AL B1 D F FF FX GA GB H H1 I K KA MM N NA NB ND P S ZZ
0 1
20 18 15.5 13 8 30.4 M5 x 0.8 depth 9 22 22 8 27 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 24 29 15 20 – 0.033 8 76 103
0 1
25 22 19.5 17 10 36.4 M6 x 1 depth 11 26 22 8 31 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 30 29 15 26 – 0.033 8 76 107
0 1
32 22 19.5 17 12 42.4 M6 x 1 depth 11 30 22 8 31 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 34.5 2915 26 – 0.033 8 78 109
0 1
40 24 21 22 14 52.4 M8 x 1.25 depth 14 36 27 11 34 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 42.5 37.5 21.5 32 – 0.039 4 104 138

Bore size NA NB WA WB W
20 31.5 17.5 27 13 8.5
25 31.5 17.5 27 13 10.5
32 31.5 17.5 27 13 11.5
40 37.5 21.5 32 16 15
192
Air Cylinder: Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod Type
Series CM2RK
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order CJ1

(Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 194.)
Made to Order CJ2

CM2RK A 20 100 CM2

CG1
With auto switch CDM2RK A 20 100 M9BW MB
Mounting style
Number of
MB1
With auto switch A Bottom mounting style auto switches
(Built-in magnet) B Front mounting style Nil 2 pcs.
CA2
S 1 pc.
n “n” pcs.
CS1
Bore size CS2
20 20 mm
Auto switch
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model 25 25 mm Nil Without auto switch
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto switch is ∗ For the applicable auto switch model,
32 32 mm
refer to the table below.
required, there is no need to enter the symbol for the 40 40 mm
auto switch.
(Example) CDM2RKB32-100
Indicator

light

(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9N
5V, 12V IC circuit
M9B
Solid state switch
2-wire 12V —
Connector H7C
Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5V, 12V G39A IC circuit
Relay,
Yes
conduit 2-wire 24V 12V — K39A —

PLC
3-wire (NPN) M9NW
3-wire (PNP) M9PW
Grommet M9BW
2-wire 12V —
3-wire —
Yes
(NPN equivalent)
Grommet
100V A93 —
No Yes No Yes No

Reed switch
100V, 200V B54 Relay,

200V or less B64 — PLC
Connector
12V — C73C
2-wire 24V
conduit A34A
Yes
100V, 200V — Relay,

DIN terminal A44A
PLC
∗ D-A9쏔V쏔/M9쏔V쏔/M9쏔WV쏔 and D-M9쏔A(V)L cannot be mounted.
-X쏔
193
Series CM2RK
Series CM2R direct mount Specifications
cylinder can be installed Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
directly through the use of a Rod non-rotating accuracy
square rod cover. Action Double acting, Single rod

Fluid Air
Non-rotating accuracy
A type of cylinder in which the rod does Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
not rotate because of its hexagonal shape Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Cylinder
ø20, ø25 0.7 Ambient and fluid temperature
ø32, ø40 0.5 Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)
Space-saving configuration Stroke length tolerance +1.4
0 mm
Because it is a directly mounted style
without using brackets, its overall length is Piston speed 50 to 500 mm/s
shorter, and its installation pitch can be Cushion Rubber bumper
made smaller. Thus, the space that is
required for installation has been
dramatically reduced.
Improved installation
accuracy and strength Standard Stroke
A centering boss has been provided to
improve the installation accuracy. Also, Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) (1)
because it is the directly mounted style, 20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
the strength has been increased.
25 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200
Two styles of installation 32 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200
Two styles of installations are available
and can be selected according to the 40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300
purpose: the front mounting style or the Note 1) Other intermediate strokes can be manufactured upon receipt of order.
bottom mounting style. ∗ Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible.
Note 2) The maximum limit is 1000 stroke, but the products that exceed the standard stroke might
not be able to fulfill the specifications.
Tightening Torque: Tighten the cylinder mounting bolts for the bottom mounting
Style (Series CM2RA) with the following tightening torque.
Bore size (mm) Hexagon socket head cap bolt size Tightening torque(N m)
20 M5 x 0.8 2.4 to 3.6
Bottom mounting style Front mounting style 25 M6 4.2 to 6.2
32 M8 10.0 to 15.0
JIS Symbol 40 M10 19.6 to 29.4
Double acting
Refer to pages 214 to 218 for cylinders with an auto switch.

Operating range

—XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (150°C)
—XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type
—XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type
—XC22 Fluororubber seals
194
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CM2RK
20-CM2RK Mounting style Bore size Stroke Precautions
Copper/fluorine-free Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matters
The type which prevents copper based ions from generating by 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for
changing the copper based materials into electroless nickel Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
cathode ray tube. Caution on Handling/Disassembly
CJ1
Warning
If a cover is rotated when installing a cylinder or screwing a fitting CJP
into the port, it is likely to damage the junction part with cover.
2. Do not operate with the cushion needle in a fully closed CJ2
condition.
Using it in the fully closed state will cause the cushion seal to be
damaged. When adjusting the cushion needle, use the “Hexagon CM2
wrench key: nominal size 1.5”.
Specifications 3. Do not open the cushion needle wide excessively. CG1
Action Double acting, Single rod If the cushion needle were set to be completely wide (more than 3
turns from fully closed), it would be equivalent to the cylinder with
no cushion, thus making the impacts extremely high. Do not use it MB
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa in such a way. Besides, using with fully open could give damage to
the piston or cover.
4. In the case of exceeding the standard stroke length,
Cushion Rubber bumper implement an intermediate support.
Piston speed 50 to 500 mm/s When using cylinder with longer stroke, implement an intermediate CA2
support for preventing the joint of rod cover and cylinder tube from
Mounting Bottom mounting style, Front mounting style being broken by vibration or external load.
∗ Auto switch can be mounted. CS1
Accessory Caution CS2
Accessory Standard equipment Option 1. Avoid using the air cylinder in such a way that rotational
Mounting Rod end nut Single knuckle joint Double knuckle joint (With pin)∗ torque would be applied to the piston rod.
If rotational torque is applied, the non-rotating guide will become
Bottom mounting style deformed, thus affecting the non-rotating accuracy.
Front mounting style Refer to the table below for the approximate values of the
allowable range of rotational torque.
∗ Knuckle pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for bore size ø40) are shipped
together. Allowable rotational torque ø20 ø25 ø32 ø40
(N·m or less) 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.44
Mass (kg) To screw a bracket or a nut onto the threaded portion at the tip of
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 the piston rod, make sure to retract the piston rod entirely, and
place a wrench over the flat portion of the rod that protrudes.
Basic Bottom mounting style 0.14 0.23 0.32 0.63 Tighten it by giving consideration to prevent the tightening torque
mass from being applied to the non-rotating guide.
Front mounting style 0.14 0.22 0.32 0.62
Calculation: (Example) CM2RKA32-100 (ø32, 100 stroke, Bottom mounting)
앫 Basic mass···············0.32 kg
앫 Additional mass········0.09 kg
앫 Cylinder stroke·········100 mm
0.32 + 0.09 x 100/50 = 0.50 kg
2. When replacing rod seals, please contact SMC.

Air leakage may be happened, depending on the position in which
a rod seal is fitted. Thus, please contact SMC when replacing
them. D-쏔
Cover and cylinder tube are connected to each other by caulking
method, thus making it impossible to disassemble. Therefore,
-X쏔
internal parts of a cylinder other than rod seal are not replaceable. Individual
4. Do not touch the cylinder during operation. -X쏔
Use caution when handling a cylinder, which is running at a high
speed and a high frequency, because the surface of a cylinder Technical
tube could get so hot enough as to cause you get burned. data
195
Series CM2RK
Construction
Rod section

No. Description Material Note Part no.
1 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 20 25 32 40
2 Head cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized
3 Cylinder tube Stainless steel
4 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated ∗ Since the seal kit does not include a grease pack, order it separately.
5 Piston rod Stainless steel Grease pack part no.: GR-S-010 (10 g)
6 Non-rotating guide Copper oil-impregnated sintered alloy
7 Seal retainer Carbon steel Nickel plated
8 Retaining ring Carbon steel Phosphate coated
9 Bumper A Urethane
10 Bumper B Urethane
12 Piston seal NBR
14 Wear ring Resin
196
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CM2RK
Bottom Mounting Style
CM2RKA Bore size Stroke
X
GA 2 x RcP
2 x øLD Width across flats B1 Y GB
MM H1 øI
CJ1
øND
N
B
LH
Width across CJP

LX flats KB AL
NB N
L A NA CJ2
H S + Stroke (mm)
ZZ + Stroke Bore size Stroke range
CM2
20 1 to 150
25 1 to 200
CG1
32 1 to 200
40 1 to 300
MB
(mm)
Bore size A AL B B1 GA GB H H1 I KB L LD
ø5.5, ø9.5 counterbore
LH LX MM N NA NB ND P S X Y ZZ MB1
20 18 15.5 30.3 13 22 8 27 5 28 8.2 33.5 depth 6.5 15 21 M8 x 1.25 24 29 15 20 – 00.033 1
8 76 39 12 103
ø6.6, ø11 counterbore
25 22 19.5 36.3 17 22 8 31 6 33.5 10.2 39 depth 7.5
ø9, ø14 counterbore
18 25 M10 x 1.25 30 29 15 26 – 00.033
0
1
8 76 43 12 107 CA2
1
32 22 19.5 42.3 17 22 8 31 6 37.5 12.2 47 depth 10 21 30 M10 x 1.25 34.5 29 15 26 – 0.033 8 78 43 12 109
ø11, ø17.5 counterbore
40 24 21 52.3 22 27 11 34 8 46.5 14.2 58.5 depth 12.5 26 38 M14 x 1.5 42.5 37.5 21.5 32 – 0.039
0 1
4 104 49 15 138 CS1
CS2
Front Mounting Style

CM2RKB Bore size Stroke
Width across
flats KB
Width across GB
4 x FF flats B1 GA 2 x RcP
MM H1 øI
øND
FX
F
FX AL
F A NA NB N
H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
20 1 to 150
25 1 to 200
32 1 to 200
40 1 to 300
(mm)
Bore size A AL B1 F FF FX GA GB H H1 I KB MM N NA NB ND P S ZZ
20 18 15.5 13 30.4 M5 x 0.8 depth 9 22 22 8 27 5 28 8.2 M8 x 1.25 24 29 15 20 – 00.033 1
8 76 103
26 – 00.033 1
25 22 19.5 17 36.4 M6 x 1 depth 11 26 22 8 31 6 33.5 10.2 M10 x 1.25 30 29 15 8 76 107
D-쏔
32 22 19.5 17 42.4 M6 x 1 depth 11 30 22 8 31 6 37.5 12.2 M10 x 1.25 34.5 29 15 26 – 00.033 1
8 78 109
32 – 00.039 1
40 24 21 22 52.4 M8 x 1.25 depth 14 36 27 11 34 8 46.5 14.2 M14 x 1.5 42.5 37.5 21.5 4 104 138
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
197
Air Cylinder: Low Friction Type
Series CM2Q
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
,,
Use the new Smooth Cylinder Series CM2Y
to realize both-direction low friction and low-
speed operation.
How to Order
Mounting style Cylinder stroke (mm)
B Basic style T Head side trunnion style
F Rod side flange style BZ Boss-cut basic style Direction of low friction
G Head side flange style Boss-cut rod side F With pressure at head side
FZ flange style
C Single clevis style B With pressure at rod side
UZ trunnion style
CM2Q L 40 150 F
With auto switch CDM2Q L 40 150 F M9BW
With auto switch Bore size Auto switch Number of
(Built-in magnet) 20 20 mm Without auto switch auto switches
Nil (Built-in magnet)
25 25 mm Nil 2 pcs.
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model 32 32 mm S 1 pc.
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto 40 40 mm n “n” pcs.
switch is required, there is no need to enter
the symbol for the auto switch.
(Example) CDM2QF32-100B
198
Air Cylinder: Centralized Piping Type
Series CM2
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
쏔 P
How to Order CJ1
(Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 200.)
Mounting style
Basic style
Rod boot CJ2
B None
Nil
F Rod side flange style
J Nylon tarpaulin CM2
U Heat resistant tarpaulin
K
CG1
Made to Order
MB
CM2 F 32 P 150 MB1
CA2
With auto switch CDM2 F 32 P 150 M9BW
CS1
Number of
Centralized piping type auto switches
With auto switch CS2
(Built-in magnet) Nil 2 pcs.
Port thread type S 1 pc.
Bore size
Nil Rc n “n” pcs.
TN NPT
25 25 mm
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto TF G Auto switch
switch is required, there is no need to enter 32 32 mm
Nil Without auto switch
the symbol for the auto switch. 40 40 mm
∗ For the applicable auto switch model, refer to
(Example) CDM2B40P-100 the table below.
Indicator

light

(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9N
5V, 12V IC circuit
Solid state switch
M9B
2-wire 12V —
Connector H7C
Relay,
Yes
3-wire (NPN) 24V — M9NW

Diagnostic indication 5V, 12V IC circuit PLC
3-wire (PNP) M9PW
Grommet M9BW
2-wire 12V —
3-wire — 5V — A96 IC circuit —

Yes
(NPN equivalent)
100V A93 —
Reed switch
Grommet
IC circuit
Yes No Yes No Yes No
100V or less A90

100V, 200V B54
12V Relay,
2-wire 24V 200V or less B64 —
PLC
— C73C
Connector
Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) — — B59W — D-쏔
1 m ······· M (Example) M9NWM ∗ D-A9쏔V쏔/M9쏔V쏔/M9쏔WV쏔 and D-M9쏔A(V)L cannot be mounted. -X쏔
199
Series CM2 쏔P
Specifications
A cylinder in which two Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
piping ports are provided in Action Double acting, Single rod
the head cover, enabling Fluid Air
pipes to be connected only in Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
the axial direction. Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
+1.4
Stroke length tolerance mm 0

50 to 700 50 to 650 50 to 590 50 to 420
Piston speed mm/s mm/s mm/s mm/s
Standard Stroke
(2)
Bore size Standard stroke (1) Maximum manufacturable stroke
JIS Symbol (mm) (mm) (mm)
Double acting,
Single rod 20
25 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
1000
32 200, 250, 300
40
Made to Order Specifications Mounting Style and Accessory

(For details, refer to pages 1373 to 1498.) Accessory Standard equipment Option
Symbol Specifications Mounting Rod end Single knuckle Double knuckle∗

Rod boot
Mounting nut nut joint joint (With pin)
—XC4 With heavy duty scraper Basic style (1 pc.)
Rod side (1)
—XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin Flange side style
Rod side
(1)
trunnion style
∗ Pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for bore size ø40) are shipped together with double knuckle
joint.
Precautions Mounting Bracket Part No.

Min. Bore size (mm)
Be sure to read before handling. Mounting bracket
order
Description (for min. order)
20 25 32 40
Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for
Trunnion (With nuts) 1 CM-T020B CM-T032B CM-T040B 1 trunnion, 1 trunnion nut
Precautions.

Operating range
200
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CM2 쏔P
Rod Boot Material Copper/Fluorine-free
Symbol Rod boot material
J Nylon tarpaulin 20-CM2 Mounting style Bore size P Stroke
∗
K Heat resistant tarpaulin Copper/fluorine-free
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot itself. The type which prevents copper based ions from generating by
changing the copper based materials into electroless nickel
Mass cathode ray tube.
(kg)
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
CJ1
Basic style 0.14 0.21 0.27 0.58
CJP
Basic
mass
Rod side flange style 0.20 0.30 0.36 0.70

Rod side trunnion style 0.18 0.28 0.33 0.68 CJ2
CM2
Option
bracket

Double knuckle (with pin) 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.20
Specifications CG1
Calculation: (Example) CM2F32P-100
앫Basic mass···············0.36 Action Double acting, Single rod
앫Additional mass········0.10
앫Cylinder stroke·········100 stroke
Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40 MB
0.36 + 0.10 x 100/50 = 0.56 kg Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
ø20 50 to 700 mm/s
ø25 50 to 650 mm/s CA2
Piston speed
ø32 50 to 590 mm/s
CS1
ø40 50 to 420 mm/s
Mounting
Basic style, Rod side flange style, CS2
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
201
Series CM2 쏔P
Construction
Component Parts
1 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 13 Retaining ring Stainless steel
2 Head cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 14 Piston seal NBR
3 Cylinder tube Stainless steel 15 Piston gasket NBR
4 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 16 Gasket Resin
5 Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated 17 Pipe gasket Urethane rubber
6 Bushing Copper oil-impregnated sintered alloy 18 Spacer gasket Resin Except ø25
7 Seal retainer Stainless steel 19 Wear ring Resin
8 Retaining ring Carbon steel Phosphate coated 20 mounting nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
9 Pipe Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 21 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
10 Stud Brass Electroless nickel plated
Replacement Part: Seal
11 Bumper A Urethane
Part no.
12 Bumper B Urethane No. Description Material
20 25 32 40
22 Rod seal NBR PDU-8Z PDU-10Z PDU-12LZ PDU-14Z
Grease pack part no.: GR-S-010 (10 g)
Basic Style (B)

Bore size P Stroke ø20 ø20 ø25
P
(Head side pressure port) P
(Head side pressure port)
P P
Effective thread length FL (Rod side pressure port) (Rod side pressure port)
Width across
flats B1 H1 H2 ø32 to ø40
Width across P
øE
flats KA
øI
G G
NA
øD
MM NN
AL
A K F N N P
H S + Stroke (Rod side pressure port) QY
ZZ + Stroke NA
(mm)
Bore size A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 H2 I K KA MM N NA NN P Q QY S ZZ
0 1
20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20 – 0.033 13 10.5 — 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 8 19.8 14 62 103
25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 – 00.033 13 10.5 — 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 1
8 22 14 62 107
1
32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 – 00.033 13 10.5 9 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 8 25.8 16 64 109
40 24 21 22 41 14 32 – 00.039 16 13.5 10.5 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 1
4 29.8 16 88 138
∗ The dimensions of air cylinders with a rod boot are the same as the standard,
double acting/single rod boss-cut style. Refer to page 135.
202
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CM2 쏔P
CM2F Bore size P Stroke ø20 ø20 ø25
P P
Z
P P
ø20 to ø32 NN F Width across (Rod side pressure port) (Rod side pressure port) P
CJ1
Width across flats B1 H1 H2 flats B2
C2 MM
øI
CJP
G G
CJ2
FB
øD
NA
Q
FX 2 x øFD
AL
CM2
FZ Mounting hole
A K FT N N QY
Width across flats KA H S + Stroke NA CG1
ø40 ZZ + Stroke
P
ø32 to ø40 MB
(Rod side pressure port)
FY
MB1
4 x øFD CA2
Mounting hole
(mm)
Bore size A AL B1 B2 C2 D F FB FD FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I K KA MM N NA NN P Q QY S Z ZZ CS1
1
20 18 15.5 13 26 30 8 13 34 7 4 60 — 75 — 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 8 19.8 14 62 37 103
25 22 19.5 17 32 37 10 13 40 7 4 60 — 75 — 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 1
8 22 14 62 41 107 CS2
1
32 22 19.5 17 32 37 12 13 40 7 4 60 — 75 9 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 8 25.8 16 64 41 109
40 24 21 22 41 47.3 14 16 52 7 5 66 36 82 10.5 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 1 4 29.8 16 88 45 138
∗ The dimensions of air cylinders with a rod boot are the same as the standard,
double acting/single rod boss-cut style. Refer to page 137.

CM2U Bore size P Stroke ø20 ø20 ø25
P P
P P
Width across flats B1 Width across (Rod side pressure port) (Rod side pressure port)
flats B2 NN ø32 to ø40
Width across flats KA P
H1 (Head side pressure port)
øI
øTD
G G
NA
øTY
øD
TX MM AL
A K TT QY
TZ
Z N N P NA
H S + Stroke (Rod side
pressure port)
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
D-쏔
Bore size A AL B1 B2 D G H H1 I K KA MM N NA NN P Q QY S TD TT TX TY TZ Z ZZ
— 1
20 18 15.5 13 26 8 41 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 8 19.8 14 62 8 10 32 32 52 36 103
-X쏔
25 22 19.5 17 32 10 — 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 1
8 22 14 62 9 10 40 40 60 40 107
32 22 19.5 17 32 12 9 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 1
8 25.8 16 64 9 10 40 40 60 40 109 Individual
1 -X쏔
40 24 21 22 41 14 10.5 50 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 4 29.8 16 88 10 11 53 53 77 44.5 138
∗ The dimensions of air cylinders with a rod boot are the same as the standard, Technical
double acting/single rod boss-cut style. Refer to page 141. data
203
Air Cylinder: With End Lock
Series CBM2
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order
CBM2 L 40 150 H N
With auto switch CDBM2 L 40 150 H N M9BW
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet)
Manual release type Number of
Mounting style N Non-lock type auto switches
B Basic style Bore size L Lock type Nil 2 pcs.
L Axial foot style 20 20 mm S 1 pc.
F Rod side flange style 25 25 mm n “n” pcs.
Lock position
G 32 32 mm
Single clevis style H Head end lock
C 40 40 mm
Double clevis style R Rod end lock
D Auto switch
Rod side trunnion style W Double end lock
U Nil Without auto switch
T ∗ For the applicable auto switch
(Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 205.) Rod boot model, refer to the table
Nil None below.
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model Cushion J Nylon tarpaulin
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto Nil Rubber bumper K Heat resistant tarpaulin
switch is required, there is no need to enter A Air cushion Made to Order
the symbol for the auto switch. (Refer to page 205 for details.)
(Example) CDBM2L40-100-HN
Indicator

light

(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9N
5V, 12V IC circuit
M9B
Solid state switch
2-wire 12V —
Connector H7C
Relay,
Yes

PLC
3-wire (NPN) M9NW
3-wire (PNP) M9PW
Grommet M9BW
2-wire 12V —
3-wire —
Yes
(NPN equivalent)
Grommet
100V A93 —
No Yes No Yes No

Reed switch
100V, 200V B54 ∗∗ Relay,

Connector
12V — C73C
2-wire 24V
conduit A34A ∗∗
Yes
100V, 200V — Relay,

PLC
204
Air Cylinder: With End Lock Series CBM2
Specifications
Holds the cylinder’s home Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Type Pneumatic
position even if the air supply Action Double acting, Single rod
is cut off. Fluid Air
When air is discharged at the stroke end Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
position, the lock engages to maintain the Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
rod in that position. Minimum operating pressure 0.15 MPa ∗
Non-lock type and lock type Ambient and fluid temperature

are standardized for manual Cushion Rubber bumper, Air cushion CJ1
release. Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)
+1.4
Auto switch is mountable.

Stroke length tolerance 0 mm CJP
Rubber bumper 50 to 750 mm/s
Piston speed
Air cushion 50 to 1000 mm/s
CJ2
Mounting Head side flange style, Single clevis style, Double clevis style,
Rod side trunnion style, Head side trunnion style CM2
∗ 0.05 MPa for other part than the lock unit
CG1
Lock Specifications MB
Lock position Head end, Rod end, Double end
ø20 ø25 ø32 ø40
Holding force (Max.) (N)
215 330 550 860
MB1
Backlash 1 mm or less
Manual release Non-lock type, Lock type CA2
CS1
Allowable Kinetic Energy
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 CS2
Rubber
bumper
Effective cushion length (mm) 11.0 11.0 11.0 11.8
Air Cushion sectional area (cm2) 2.09 3.30 5.86 9.08
cushion Kinetic energy
Made to Order Specifications absorbable (J) 0.54 0.78 1.27 2.35
—XA쏔 Change of rod end shape Standard Stroke
—XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (150 ) Bore size Standard stroke Long stroke ∗ Maximum manufacturable
(mm) (mm) (mm) stroke (mm)
20 400
—XC3 Special port location 25, 50, 75, 100,
25 450
—XC4 ∗ With heavy duty scraper 125, 150, 200, 250 1000
32 450
—XC5 Heat resistant cylinder (110 ) 300
40 500
—XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel ∗ Long stroke applies to the axial foot style and the rod side flange style only.
—XC8 ∗ Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type When using other types of mounting brackets or exceeding the long stroke limit, the
maximum allowable stroke will be determined by the stroke selection table listed on front
matter 28.
—XC22 Fluororubber seals ∗ Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
—XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin Refer to pages 214 to 218 for cylinders with auto switches.
—XC35 With coil scraper Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting
—XC52 Mounting nut with set screw Proper auto switch mounting position (detection at stroke end) and mounting height
∗ Available only for locking at head end Operating range
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
205
Series CBM2
Accessory/For details, refer to pages 144 and 145, since it is the same as Series CM2 standard type. Rod Boot Material
Standard Symbol Rod boot material
Mounting nut, Rod end nut, Clevis pin, Lock release bolt (N type only)
equipment J Nylon tarpaulin
K Heat resistant tarpaulin ∗
Option Single knuckle joint, Double knuckle joint (With pin)
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot itself.
∗ Mounting nuts are not equipped to single clevis and double clevis.
Mass (kg)
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Basic style 0.14 0.21 0.28 0.56
Axial foot style 0.29 0.37 0.44 0.83
Basic Flange style 0.20 0.30 0.37 0.68
mass Single clevis 0.18 0.25 0.32 0.65
Double clevis style 0.19 0.27 0.33 0.69
Trunnion style 0.18 0.28 0.34 0.66
Clevis bracket (With pin) 0.07 0.07 0.14 0.14
Accessory Single knuckle joint 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.23
Double knuckle joint (With pin) 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.20
Lock Unit Additional Mass (kg)

Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Head end lock (H) 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04
Manual release
Rod end lock (R) 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.02
non-lock type (N)
Double end lock (W) 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.06
Head end lock (H) 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.06
Manual release
Rod end lock (R) 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04
lock type (L)
Double end lock (W) 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.10
Calculation: (Example) CBM2L32-100-HN
Basic mass····················· 0.44 (Foot style, ø32)
Additional mass ·············· 0.08/50 stroke
Cylinder stroke················100 stroke
Locking mass ················· 0.02 (Locking at head end, Manual release non-locking type)
0.44 + 0.08 x 100/50 + 0.02 = 0.62 kg

Min. Bore size (mm)
Mounting bracket Description (for min. order)
order 20 25 32 40
Single clevis∗∗ 1 CM-C020B CM-C032B CM-C040B 1 single clevis, 3 liners
∗∗
∗∗∗ 1 double clevis, 3 liners,
Double clevis (With pin) 1 CM-D020B CM-D032B CM-D040B
1 clevis pin, 2 retaining rings
Trunnion (With nut) 1 CM-T020B CM-T032B CM-T040B 1 trunnion, 1 trunnion nut
∗∗∗ Clevis pins and retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are attached.
206
Double Rod Type End Lock Cylinder
CBM2W Mounting style Bore size Stroke H Manual release type

Double rod type end lock cylinder
Specifications Dimensions
Action Double acting, Double rod Bore size
H ZZ
Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40 (mm)
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa 20 41 144 CJ1
Min. operating pressure 0.15 MPa 25 45 152
Cushion Rubber bumper 32 45 154 CJP
Piston speed 50 to 750 mm/s 40 50 188
Mounting Basic style, Foot style, Flange style, Trunnion style ∗ Dimensions for other bore sizes are the CJ2
same as the double acting single rod model.
Lock position Head end lock
Maximum manufacturable stroke 500 mm
CM2
Note 1) Auto switch can be mounted.
Note 2) Refer to the Precautions on page 210 when mounting flanges and trun- CG1
nion brackets on the end lock side.
determined by the stroke selection table (front matter 28). MB
MB1
CA2
CS1
CS2
H H + stroke
ZZ + 2 x stroke
Non-rotating Rod Type End Lock Cylinder
CBM2K Mounting style Bore size Stroke H Manual release type

Non-rotating rod type end lock cylinder
Specifications Dimensions
Action Double acting, Double rod Bore size
KA
Bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40 (mm)
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa 20 8.2
Min. operating pressure 0.15 MPa 25 10.2
Cushion Rubber bumper 32 12.2
Piston speed 50 to 500 mm/s 40 14.2
Basic, foot, rod side flange, ∗ Dimensions for other bore sizes are the
same as the double acting single rod model.
head side flange, single clevis,
Mounting
double clevis, rod side trunnion,
head side trunnion
Lock position Head end lock
Maximum manufacturable stroke 1000 mm
Note 1) Auto switch can be mounted.
Note 2) Refer to the Precautions on page 210 for the head side flange and head
side trunnion styles.
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
207
Series CBM2
Construction
Head end lock
Manual release (Non-lock type): Suffix N Manual release (Lock type): Suffix L
Rod end lock With air cushion
Component Parts Component Parts

1 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 26 Rod seal NBR
2 Head cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 27 Lock piston seal NBR
3 Cylinder tube Stainless steel 33 Cushion needle seal NBR
Replacement Parts: Seal Kit
7 With lock in single end
Seal retainer Stainless steel
8 Retaining ring Carbon steel Phosphate coated Bore size
(mm) 20 25 32 40
Hard chrome plated,
9 Lock piston Carbon steel Heat treated
10 Lock bushing Kit no. CBM2-20-PS CBM2-25-PS CBM2-32-PS CBM2-40-PS
Copper alloy
11 Lock spring Stainless steel With lock at double ends
Kit no. CBM2-20-PS-W CBM2-25-PS-W CBM2-32-PS-W CBM2-40-PS-W
12 Bumper Urethane
Hexagon socket ∗ Seal kit includes @6 and @7. Order the seal kit, based on each bore size.
13 head cap screw Alloy steel Black zinc chromated
(Except #3.)
14A Cap A Aluminum die-casted Black painted ∗ Seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g). Order with the following part
14B Cap B Carbon steel Oxide film treated number when only the grease pack is needed.
15 Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g)
Rubber cap Synthetic rubber
16 M/O knob Zinc die-casted Black painted
17 M/O bolt Alloy steel Black zinc chromated
How to Change Seal Kit
18 M/O spring Steel wire Zinc chromated
19 Stopper ring Carbon steel Zinc chromated <Removal>
20 Bumper A Urethane 앫Remove the retaining ring (A) by using a tool for installing a type C
21 Bumper B Urethane retaining ring for hole. Shut off the port on the rod cover by finger
and then pull out the piston rod, and the seal retainer (B) and the
rod seal (C) are removed. Port
23 Piston seal NBR <Mounting>
24 Piston gasket NBR 앫After applying enough grease on
25 Wear ring Resin the rod seal, attach in this order,
28 Mounting nut Carbon steel Nickel plated rod seal (C), seal retainer (B) and
29
retaining ring (A).
Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
30 Cushion ring Aluminum alloy Anodized
31 Cushion needle Alloy steel Electroless nickel plated (C) Rod seal
32 Cushion seal Urethane
(B) Seal retainer
(A) Retaining ring
208
Basic Style (Dimensions are common irrespective of the lock position; rod end, head end, or double end.)
Head end lock: CBM2B Bore size Stroke -HN
DL ø
Width across flats B2 H2 2 x RcP 2 x NN
øI
HR
NA
2 x øEh8
NA
øD
CJ1
H1 NA
MM G G Effective thread length
2 x FL
NA
ø20 CJP
Width across AL
flats KA A K F N N Manual release (Non-lock type): Suffix N
H S + Stroke F CJ2
ZZ + Stroke
CM2
DL
øMO
Rod end lock: CBM2B Bore size Stroke -RN CG1
MB
HN
MB1
CA2
CS1
Double end lock: CBM2B Bore size Stroke -WN Manual release (Lock type): Suffix L
CS2
With rod boot
8 l 8
Width across
flats B3
øe
JH
f
h JW
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Symbol Stroke HN
Bore size range A AL B1 B2 D DL E F FL G H H1 H2 HR I K KA MM MO N NA NN P S ZZ
(mm) (Max.)
0
20 Up to 300 18 15.5 13 26 8 7.5 20 13 10.5 8 –0.033 41 5 8 22.3 34 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 62 116
0
25 Up to 300 22 19.5 17 32 10 7.5 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 25.3 37 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 62 120
0
32 Up to 300 22 19.5 17 32 12 7.5 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 27.6 39.3 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 64 122
0
40 Up to 300 24 21 22 41 14 10.7 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 33.6 47.8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 19 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 88 154
With Rod Boot (mm)
Symbol h l
Bore size B3 e f
(mm) 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
20 30 36 18 68 81 93 106 131 156 181 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125
25 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 160 185 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125
32 32 36 18 72 85 97 110 135 160 185 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125
40 41 46 20 77 90 102 115 140 165 190 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125
With Rod Boot (mm)
Symbol ZZ
JH JW
Bore size
(mm) 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 D-쏔
20 143 156 168 181 206 231 256 23.5 10.5
25 147 160 172 185 210 235 260 23.5 10.5 -X쏔
32 149 162 174 187 212 237 262 23.5 10.5
Individual
40 181 194 206 219 244 269 294 27 10.5 -X쏔
∗ For details about the rod end nut and accessory, refer to pages 144 and 145. Technical
data
209
Series CBM2
With Mounting Bracket (For dimensions not indicated below, refer to page 209.)
-H N
Axial foot style: CBM2L Bore size Stroke -R L
-W
B
2 x øLC
4 x øLD
LH
LT
Y X X Y
Z LS + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke LX
LZ
-H N
Rod side flange style: CBM2F Bore size Stroke -R L Head side flange style:
-H N
-W
4 x øFD CBM2G Bore size Stroke -R L
-W
2 x øFD Mounting hole
C2
Mounting hole
FY
B
FX FT
FZ Z FT Z + Stroke
ø40
ø20 to ø32
-H N
Single clevis style: CBM2C Bore size Stroke -R L øCD
-W
U
L ø20
Z + Stroke RR
CX
ZZ + Stroke
-H N
Double clevis style: CBM2D Bore size Stroke -R L øCD hole H10
-W Axis d9
∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring

(cotter pin for bore size ø40) are
U shipped together.
L ø20
Z + Stroke RR CX
ZZ + Stroke CZ
-H N Head side trunnion style:

-H N
Rod side trunnion style: CBM2U Bore size Stroke -R L CBM2T Bore size Stroke -R L
-W -W
øTD
øTY
TT TT
TX Z + Stroke
TZ Z
ZZ + Stroke ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore Axial foot style Flange style Clevis style Trunnion style
size
Stroke Stroke range Z Stroke Stroke Z ZZ
(mm) range B LC LD LH LS LT LX LZ X Y Z ZZ B C2 FD FT FX FY FZ range CD CX CZ L RR U Z ZZ range TD TT TX TY TZ
Rod side Head side Rod side Head side Rod side Head side Rod side Head side
20 to 400 40 4 6.8 25 102 3.2 40 55 20 8 21 131 Up to 400 Up to 300 34 30 7 4 60 — 75 37 107 Up to 300 9 10 19 30 9 14 133 142 Up to 300 8 10 32 32 52 36 108 116 118
40 to 500 54 4 7 30 134 3.2 55 75 23 10 27 171 Up to 500 Up to 300 52 47.3 7 5 66 36 82 45 143 Up to 300 10 15 30 39 11 18 177 188 Up to 300 10 11 53 53 77 44.5 143.5 154 154
∗ Dimensions other than mentioned above are the same as on page 209.
Precautions on Trunnion Style, Flange Style

1. Trunnion style 2. Flange style (ø20 to ø32)
a With lock in rod side of the rod side trunnion style s With lock in head side of a With lock in rod side of the rod side flange style s With lock in head side of the
the head side trunnion style d With lock in both sides. For above cases, use head side flange style d With lock in both sides. For above cases, use caution
caution since the trunnion pin and fittings may be interfered with each other since the bolt for mounting a cylinder and fittings may be interfered with each other.
because the trunnion pin and port are very closed to each other. Refer to “Special Port Position” in “Made to Order Specifications” on page 1416.
210
With Air Cushion (For dimensions not indicated below, refer to pages 209 and 210.)
Basic style
Head end lock: CBM2B Bore size Stroke A-HN
WA1 WA2 Cushion needle
45°
S + Stroke ø20 CJ1
ZZ + Stroke Manual release (Non-lock type): Suffix N
CJP
Bore size S WA1 WA2 ZZ CJ2
(mm) Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock
20 72 73 83 13 24 24 23 13 23 126 127 137
25 72 73 83 13 24 24 23 13 23 130 131 141
CM2
32 72 75 83 13 24 24 21 13 21 130 133 141
40 93 96 101 16 24 24 21 16 21 159 162 167 CG1
-H N
Axial foot style: CBM2L Bore size Stroke A -R L MB
-W
MB1
CA2
LS + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke CS1
Head side flange style: -H N
-H N
Rod side flange style: CBM2F Bore size Stroke A -R L CBM2G Bore size Stroke A -R L CS2
-W -W
Z + Stroke
-H N -H N
Single clevis style: CBM2C Bore size Stroke A -R L Double clevis style: CBM2D Bore size Stroke A -R L
-W -W
Z + Stroke Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke ZZ + Stroke
Rod side trunnion style: -H N Head side trunnion style: -H N

CBM2U Bore size Stroke A -R L CBM2T Bore size Stroke A -R L
-W -W
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Axial foot style Head side flange style
Bore size
LS ZZ Z
(mm)
Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock
20 112 113 123 141 142 152 117 118 128
25 112 113 123 145 146 156 121 122 132
32 112 115 123 145 148 156 121 124 132
40 139 142 147 176 179 184 148 151 156
(mm) D-쏔
Clevis style Head side trunnion style
Bore size
(mm)
Z ZZ Z ZZ -X쏔
Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock
20 143 144 154 152 153 163 118 119 129 128 129 139 Individual
25 147 148 158 156 157 167 122 123 133 132 133 143 -X쏔
32 147 150 158 156 159 167 122 125 133 132 135 143 Technical
40 182 185 190 193 196 201 148.5 151.5 156.5 159 162 167 data
211
Series CBM2
Specific Product Precautions 1
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions
and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Use the Recommended Pneumatic Circuit Operating Pressure

Caution Caution
쎲This is necessary for proper operation and release 1. Use pressures over 0.15 MPa at port with locking mechanism.
of the lock.
Exhaust Speed
Caution
1. Locking will occur automatically if the pressure applied to the
port on the lock mechanism side falls to 0.05 MPa or less. In
cases where the piping on the lock mechanism side is long
and thin, or the speed controller is separated at some distance
from the cylinder port, the exhaust speed will be reduced. Take
note that some time may be required for the lock to engage. In
addition, clogging of a silencer mounted on the solenoid valve
exhaust port can produce the same effect.
Relation to Cushion
Head end lock Rod end lock Caution
1. When cushion valve at side with locking mechanism is fully
opened or closed, piston rod may reached at stroke end. Thus
Operating Precautions lock is not established. And when locking is done at cushion
Caution valve fully closed, adjust cushion valve since lock may not be
released.
1. Do not use 3 position solenoid valves.
Avoid use in combination with 3 position solenoid valves
(especially closed center metal seal types). If pressure is Releasing the Lock
trapped in the port on the lock mechanism side, the cylinder
cannot be locked. Furthermore, even after being locked, the Warning
lock may be released after some time, due to air leaking from 1. Before releasing the lock, be sure to supply air to the side
the solenoid valve and entering the cylinder. without the lock mechanism, so that there is no load applied to
2. Back pressure is required to release end lock. the lock mechanism when it is released. (Refer to the
Be sure air is supplied to side of cylinder without the recommended pneumatic circuits.) If the lock is released when
locking mechanism, as above, prior to supplying air the port on the other side is in an exhaust state, and with a
pressure to the side with end lock or lock may not be load applied to the lock unit, the lock unit may be subjected to
released. (Refer to “Releasing the Lock”.) an excessive force and be damaged. Furthermore, sudden
movement of the piston rod is very dangerous.
3. Release the lock when mounting or adjusting the
cylinder.
If mounting or other work is performed when the cylinder is
locked, the lock unit may be damaged.
4. Operate with a load ratio of 50% or less.
If the load ratio exceeds 50%, this may cause problems such
as failure of the lock to release, or damage to the lock unit.
5. Do not operate multiple cylinders in
synchronization.
Avoid applications in which two or more end lock cylinders are
synchronized to move one workpiece, as one of the cylinder
locks may not be able to release when required.
6. Use a speed controller with meter-out control.
Lock cannot be released occasionally by meter-in control.
7. Be sure to operate completely to the cylinder stroke
end on the side with the lock.
If the cylinder piston does not reach the end of the stroke,
locking might not work or locking might not be released.
212
Series CBM2
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions
and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Manual Release Working Principle

Caution The figures below are for Series CBA2.
1. Manual release (Non-lock type) 쎲Head end lock (Rod end lock is the same, too.)
Insert the accessory bolt from the top of the rubber cap (it is 1. When the piston rod is getting closer to the stroke end, the
not necessary to remove the rubber cap), and after screwing it taper part (∗) of the piston rod edge will push the lock piston CJ1
into the lock piston, pull it to release the lock. If you stop up.
pulling the bolt, the lock will return to an operational state. Spring CJP
Thread sizes, pulling forces and strokes are as shown below.
Lock piston
Bore size (mm) Thread size Pulling force Stroke (mm)
CJ2
20, 25, 32 M2.5 x 0.45 x 25l or more 4.9 N 2
40 M3 x 0.5 x 30l or more 10 N 3
CM2
Pressure
Remove the bolt for normal operation. CG1
It can cause lock malfunction or faulty release.
Piston rod
MB
Rubber cap
∗
MB1
2. Lock piston is pushed up further.
CA2
CS1
CS2
2. Manual release (Lock type)

While pushing the M/O knob, turn it 90° counterclockwise. The
lock is released (and remains in a released state) by aligning 3. Lock piston is pushed up into the groove of piston rod to
the 왖 mark on the cap with the 왔 OFF mark on the M/O knob. lock it. (Lock piston is pushed up by spring force.) At this
When locking is desired, turn M/O button clockwise 90° while time, it is exhausted from port in head side and introduced
pushing fully, correspond 왖 on cap and 왔 ON mark on M/O to atmosphere.
button. The correct position is confirmed by a click sound
“click”.
If not confirmed, locking is not done.
Lock
Unlock
Locked
4. When pressure is supplied in the head side, lock piston will

be pushed up to release the lock.
Back pressure
Locked Released Exhaust
Pressure
Released
5. Lock will be released, then cylinder will move forward.
D-쏔
Exhaust
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
213
Series CM2
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Its Mounting Height
Reed auto switch Solid state auto switch
D-A9 D-M9
D-M9 W
≅ Hs Auto switch ≅ Hs Auto switch
16.5
16.5
A 22 B A 22 B
(24.5)
( ): Dimensions of D-A93 type
D-C7/C8 D-H7 /H7 W/H7NF/H7BAL

≅ Hs ≅ Hs
A B Auto switch
Auto switch A B
D-B5/B6/B59W D-G5NTL
≅ Hs ≅ Hs
A B Auto switch
Auto switch A B
D-A33A/A34A D-G39A/K39A
≅ Hs G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D. ≅ Hs G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D.
ø6.8 to ø9.6) ø6.8 to ø9.6)
A Auto switch B A Auto switch B
D-A44A D-H7C
≅ Hs Auto switch Auto switch

≅ Hs
A B
A B
G 1/2 (Applicable cable
O.D. ø6.8 to ø11.5)
D-C73C/C80C
Auto switch
≅ Hs
A B
214
Air Cylinder Series CM2
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Its Mounting Height
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Excluding Single Acting Type) (mm)
Auto switch
model D-H7쏔
D-C7쏔 D-A3쏔A
D-M9쏔 D-H7C
D-B5쏔 D-C80 D-G39A
D-A9쏔 D-B59W D-H7쏔W D-G5NTL
D-M9쏔W D-B64 D-C73C D-K39A
D-H7BAL
D-C80C D-A44A
D-H7NF
Bore size
A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B CJ1
6.5 5.5 10.5 9.5 1 0 7 6 4 3 0.5 0 6 5 2.5 1.5
20 (4) (3) (8) (7) (—) (—) (5) (4) (2) (1) (—) (—) (4) (3) (0.5) (0) CJP
6.5 5.5 10.5 9.5 1 0 7 6 4 3 0.5 0 6 5 2.5 1.5
25 (4) (3) (8) (7) (—) (—) (5) (4) (2) (1) (—) (—) (4) (3) (0.5) (0) CJ2
7.5 6.5 11.5 10.5 2 1 8 7 5 4 1.5 0.5 7 6 3.5 2.5
32 (5) (4) (9) (8) (0) (0) (6) (5) (3) (2) (0) (0) (5) (4) (1.5) (0.5) CM2
40 13.5 11.5 17.5 15.5 7 6 13 12 10 9 6.5 5.5 12 11 8.5 7.5
∗ ( ): Setting position for the auto switch with an air cushion. CG1
D-B5/B6/A3쏔A/A44A/G39A/K39A cannot be mounted on the bore size ø20 and ø25 cylinder with an air cushion.
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating condition in the actual setting.
MB
Auto Switch Mounting Height (mm)
Auto switch D-C7쏔
MB1
D-B5쏔
model
D-A9쏔 D-C80
D-B64 D-A3쏔A
D-M9쏔 D-B59W
D-H7쏔 D-C73C
D-G39A D-A44A CA2
D-H7쏔W D-C80C
D-M9쏔W D-G5NTL D-K39A
D-H7BAL
D-H7C
D-H7NF CS1
Bore size Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs
20 22 25.5 22.5 25 60 69.5 CS2
25 24.5 28 25 27.5 62.5 72
32 28 31.5 28.5 31 66 75.5
40 32 35.5 32.5 35 70 79.5
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
Technical
data
215
Series CM2
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and
Mounting Height: Single Acting/Spring Return Type (S), Spring Extend Type (T)
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position: Standard Type/Spring Return Type (S),
Non-rotating Rod Type/Spring Return Type (S) (mm)
A Dimensions
Auto switch model Bore size B
Up to 15st 51 to 100st 101 to 150st 151 to 200st 201 to 250st
20 31.5 56.5 81.5 — — 5.5
25 31.5 56.5 81.5 — — 5.5
D-A9쏔
32 32.5 57.5 82.5 107.5 — 6.5
40 38.5 63.5 88.5 113.5 138.5 11.5
20 35.5 60.5 85.5 — — 9.5
D-M9쏔 25 35.5 60.5 85.5 — — 9.5
D-M9쏔W 32 36.5 61.5 86.5 111.5 — 10.5
40 42.5 67.5 92.5 117.5 142.5 15.5
20 26 51 76 — — 0
D-B5쏔 25 26 51 76 — — 0
D-B64 32 27 52 77 102 — 1
40 32 57 82 107 132 6
D-C7쏔 20 32 57 82 — — 6
D-C80 25 32 57 82 — — 6
D-C73C 32 33 58 83 108 — 7
D-C80C 40 38 63 88 113 138 12
20 29 54 79 — — 3
25 29 54 79 — — 3
D-B59W
32 30 55 80 105 — 4
40 35 60 85 110 135 9
D-A3쏔A 20 25.5 50.5 75.5 — — 0
D-G39A 25 25.5 50.5 75.5 — — 0
D-K39A 32 26.5 51.5 76.5 101.5 — 0.5
D-A44A 40 31.5 56.5 81.5 106.5 131.5 5.5
D-H7쏔 20 31 56 81 — — 5
D-H7C 25 31 56 81 — — 5
D-H7쏔W
D-H7BAL 32 32 57 82 107 — 6
D-H7NF 40 37 62 87 112 137 11
20 27.5 52.5 77.5 — — 1.5
25 27.5 52.5 77.5 — — 1.5 Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming
D-G5NTL
32 28.5 53.5 78.5 103.5 — 2.5 the operating condition in the actual
40 33.5 58.5 83.5 108.5 133.5 7.5 setting.
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position: Standard Type/Spring Extend Type (T),
Non-rotating Rod Type/Spring Extend Type (T) (mm)
A B Dimensions
Auto switch model Bore size
Up to 15st 51 to 100st 101 to 150st 151 to 200st 201 to 250st
20 6.5 30.5 55.5 80.5 — —
25 6.5 30.5 55.5 80.5 — —
D-A9첸
32 7.5 31.5 56.5 81.5 106.5 —
40 13.5 36.5 61.5 86.5 111.5 136.5
20 10.5 34.5 59.5 84.5 — —
D-M9첸 25 10.5 34.5 59.5 84.5 — —
D-M9첸W 32 11.5 35.5 60.5 85.5 110.5 —
40 17.5 40.5 65.5 90.5 115.5 140.5
20 1 25 50 75 — —
D-B5첸 25 1 25 50 75 — —
D-B64 32 2 26 51 76 101 —
40 7 31 56 81 106 131
D-C7첸 20 7 31 56 81 — —
D-C80 25 7 31 56 81 — —
D-C73C 32 8 32 57 82 107 —
D-C80C 40 13 37 62 87 112 137
20 4 28 53 78 — —
25 4 28 53 78 — —
D-B59W
32 5 29 54 79 104 —
40 10 34 59 84 109 134
D-A3첸A 20 0.5 24.5 49.5 74.5 — —
D-G39A 25 0.5 24.5 49.5 74.5 — —
D-K39A 32 1.5 25.5 50.5 75.5 100.5 —
D-A44A 40 6.5 30.5 55.5 80.5 105.5 130.5
D-H7첸 20 6 30 55 80 — —
D-H7C 25 6 30 55 80 — —
D-H7첸W
D-H7BAL 32 7 31 56 81 106 —
D-H7NF 40 12 36 61 86 111 136
20 2.5 26.5 51.5 76.5 — —
25 2.5 26.5 51.5 76.5 — — Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming
D-G5NTL
32 3.5 27.5 52.5 77.5 102.5 — the operating condition in the actual
40 8.5 32.5 57.5 81.5 107.5 132.5 setting.
216
Air Cylinder Series CM2
Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke

n: No. of auto switch (mm)
No. of auto switch mounted
Auto switch model 2 n
1
Different surfaces Same surface Different surfaces Same surface
D-A9첸 15 + 45
(n – 2)
D-M9첸 10 15 (1) 45 (1) 2 45 + 45(n – 2)
D-M9첸W (n=2, 4, 6···)
(n – 2)
D-C7첸 10 15 50
15 + 45
2 50 + 45(n – 2)
D-C80 (n=2, 4, 6···) CJ1
D-H7첸
D-H7첸W 15 + 45
(n – 2) CJP
10 15 60 2 60 + 45(n – 2)
D-H7BAL (n=2, 4, 6···)
D-H7NF CJ2
D-C73C 15 + 50
(n – 2)
D-C80C
D-H7C
10 15 65 2
(n=2, 4, 6···)
65 + 50(n – 2) CM2
D-B5첸/B64 10 15 75
15 + 50
(n – 2)
2 75 + 55(n – 2)
CG1
D-G5NTL (n=2, 4, 6···)
(n – 2) MB
20 + 50
D-B59W 15 20 75 2 75 + 55(n – 2)
(n=2, 4, 6···)
MB1
D-A3첸A(2)
D-G39A
D-K39A
10 35 100 35 + 30(n – 2) 100 + 100(n – 2) CA2
D-A44A
Note 1) Auto switch mounting (The adjustment as shown in the figures below is required with the following stroke ranges.) CS1
With 2 auto switches
Different surfaces (1) Same surface (1) CS2
A
A-6 6 15
Auto switch model
Auto switch
D-M9첸 6 B-6
D-M9첸W B
The auto switch is mounted by slightly displacing it in a direction
The proper auto switch mounting position is 6 mm inward from the (cylinder tube circumferential exterior) so that the auto switch and
switch holder edge. lead wire do not interfere with each other.
D-A93 — 45 to less than 50 stroke

D-M9첸
15 to less than 20 stroke 45 to less than 55 stroke
D-M9첸W
Note 2) D-A3첸A/A44A/G39A/K39A cannot be mounted on the centralized piping type Series CDM2첸P.
Operating Range
(mm)
Bore size
Auto switch model
20 25 32 40
D-A9첸 6 6 6 6
D-M9첸
3 3 4 3.5
D-M9첸W
D-C7첸/C80
7 8 8 8
D-C73C/C80C
D-B5첸/B64 D-쏔
8 8 9 9 ∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis,
D-A3첸A/A44ANote) not meant to be guaranteed. (Assuming
D-B59W 12 12 13 13 approximately ±30% dispersion.) There may -X쏔
be the case it will vary substantially depending
D-H7첸/H7첸W/H7BAL on an ambient environment. Individual
4 4 4.5 5
D-G5NTL/H7NF -X쏔
Note) D-A3첸A/A44A/G39A/K39A cannot be
D-H7C 7 8.5 9 10 mounted on the centralized piping type Technical
D-G39A/K39ANote) 8 9 9 9 Series CDM2첸P. data
217
Series CM2
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket: Part No.
Bore size (mm)

Auto switch model
ø20 ø25 ø32 ø40
D-A9 Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) Note 1)
D-M9 qBM2-020 qBM2-025 qBM2-032 qBM2-040
D-M9 W wBJ3-1 wBJ3-1 wBJ3-1 wBJ3-1
D-C7 /C80
D-C73C/C80C
D-H7 BM2-020 BM2-025 BM2-032 BM2-040
D-H7 W
D-H7BAL
D-H7NF
D-B5 /B64
D-B59W BA2-020 BA2-025 BA2-032 BA2-040
D-G5NTL
D-G5NBL
D-A3 A/A44ANote 2) BM3-020 BM3-025 BM3-032 BM3-040
D-G39A/K39A
Note 1) Two kinds of auto switch brackets are used as a set.
Note 2) D-A3첸A/A44A/G39A/K39A cannot be mounted on the centralized piping type Series CDM2첸P.
[Mounting screw set made of stainless steel]
The following set of mounting screws made of stainless steel (including nuts) is available. Use it in
accordance with the operating environment. (Please order the auto switch mounting bracket separately,
since it is not included.)
BBA4: For D-C7/C8/H7 types
Note 3) Refer to page 1358 for the details of BBA4 screws.
The above stainless steel screws are used when a cylinder is shipped with D-H7BAL type auto
switches. When only an auto switch is shipped independently, BBA4 screws are attached.
e
Switch spacer
(Stainless steel)
d
Switch holder
(Resin)
Auto switch
b
c Auto switch mounting screw
Set screw
Switch bracket
(Stainless steel)
1. BJ2- : A set of a and b above

2. BJ3-1: A set of c, d and e above
a
Auto switch mounting band
Besides the models listed in How to Order, the following auto switches are applicable.
Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for the detailed specifications.
Auto switch type Part no. Electrical entry (Entry direction) Features
D-B53, C73, C76 —
Reed
D-C80 Without indicator light
D-H7A1, H7A2, H7B Grommet (In-line) —
Sold state D-H7NW, H7PW, H7BW Diagnosis indication (2-color indication)
D-G5NTL With timer
∗ For solid state switches, auto switches with a pre-wired connector are also available. Refer to pages 1328 and 1329 for details.
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact) solid state auto switches (D-F9G/F9H types) are also available. Refer to page 1290 for details.
∗ A wide range detection type, solid state auto switch (D-GNBL type) is also available. Refer to page 1320 for details.
218
Fine Lock Cylinders/Lock-up Cylinder
Series CL
ø16, ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100, ø125, ø140, ø160
CLJ2
Locking Spring Pneumatic Spring and Locking in both directions is possible.
method locking locking pneumatic locking Locking in either side of cylinder stroke is CLM2
• Unlocking • Pressure • Pressure locking possible, too.
Discharging locking The holding power
c a n b e va r i e d
(The lock-up cylinder can be locked only in one CLG1
the air causes The holding
according to the direction.)
the lock to
operate.
power can be
varied according
air pressure that is CL1
Features applied to the port.
to the air
pressure that is • Unlocking
MLGC
applied to the Discharging the air
port. causes the lock to CNG
operate.
(Lock-up cylinders are spring locking only.) MNB
CNA
CNS
Series Variations CLS

Standard variations Standard
Locking Locking method Bore size
Series Action Rod
Auto switch direction Spring Pneumatic Spring and
(mm)
stroke
(mm)
Page CLQ
With rod boot
built-in magnet locking locking Pneumatic locking
RLQ
Fine lock cylinders
Series CLJ2 MLU
15
Double Single Both
acting rod directions
16 to 601 MLGP
200
ML1C
Series CLM2
20 25
Double Single Both 25 to
acting rod directions 611
32
300
40
Series CLG1 20 25 to 200
Double Single Both 25 25

acting rod directions 32 625
to
40 300
Lock-up cylinder
Series CL1 40 25 to 500
50, 63 25 to 600
Double Single One
acting rod direction 80, 100 25 to 700 636
125, 140 Up to 1000
160 Up to 1200 D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
595
Series CL
The precautions on these pages are for the fine lock cylinders and the lock-up cylinders.
For general actuator precautions, refer to Actuator Precautions on pages 3 to 7.
Design of Equipment and Machinery 2. When kinetic energy acts upon the cylinder, 6. To effect an intermediate stop, take the
such as when effecting an intermediate cylinder’s stopping precision and overrun
Warning stop, there are constraints in terms of the amount into consideration.
allowable kinetic energy that can be Because the lock is applied by mechanical
1. Construct so that the human body will not applied to the cylinder in a locked state. means, the piston will not stop immediately
come into direct contact with driven objects Therefore, refer to the allowable kinetic in response to a stopping signal, but only
or the moving parts of locking cylinders. energy of the respective ser ies. after a time lag. This lag determines the
If there is a risk of contact, provide safety Fur ther more, dur ing locking, the amount of the overrun of the piston stroke.
measures such as a cover or a system that mechanism must sustain the thrust of the Thus, the range of the maximum and
uses sensors that will activate an cylinder itself, in addition to absorbing the minimum amounts of the overrun is the
emergency stop before contact is made. kinetic energy. Therefore, even within a stopping precision.
2. Use a balance circuit in which lurching of given allowable kinetic energy level, there • Place the limit switch before the desired
the piston is taken into consideration. If the is an upper limit to the amount of the load stopping position, only in the amount of
lock is applied at a desired position of a that can be sustained. the overrun.
stroke and compressed air is applied to • Fine lock series (Series CLJ2/CLM2/ • The limit switch must have a detection
only one side of the cylinder, the piston will CLG1) length (dog length) of the overrun
lurch at a high speed the moment the lock Maximum load at horizontal mounting: amount + α.
is disengaged. In such a situation, there is 70% or less of the holding force • For SMC’s auto switches, the operating
a risk of injury to humans, or equipment (Maximum static load) for spring lock range are between 8 and 14 mm. (It
damage. To prevent the piston from Maximum load at vertical mounting: 35% varies depending on a switch model.)
lurching, use a balance circuit such as the or less of the holding force (Maximum When the overrun amount exceeds this
recommended pneumatic circuit (P. 598). If static load) for spring lock range, self-holding of the contact should
an air-hydro fine lock cylinder is used, • Lock-up series (Series CL1) be performed at the switch load side.
make sure to operate the lock portion Maximum load at horizontal mounting: ∗ For stopping accuracy, refer to Series CLJ
through air pressure. Never use oil on the 50% or less of the holding force (P. 603), Series CLM2 (P. 614), Series
lock-up cylinder because the lock-up (Maximum static load) CLG1 (P. 627), and Series CL1 (P. 637)
cylinder is a non-lube style. Failure to Maximum load at vertical mounting: 25% respectively.
observe this could cause the lock to or less of the holding force (Maximum
malfunction. static load)
3. In a locked state, do not apply impacts,
strong vibrations or rotational forces.
Do not apply a impacts, strong vibrations or
rotational forces from external sources,
Selection because this could damage or shorten the
life of the lock unit.
Warning 4. The locking of the fine lock cylinder is
Refer to the following criteria for the directional.
maximum load in the locked state, and Although the fine lock cylinder can be locked
set. in both directions, be aware that its holding
force is smaller in one of the directions. Stop signal
When a cylinder is in a no-load and locked CLJ2/CLM2/CLG1···· Holding force at piston Overrun amount
state, the holding force (maximum static load) rod extended side decreases approx. 15%.
is the lock’s ability to hold a static load that 5. The locking of the lock-up cylinder is
does not involve vibrations or shocks. To unidirectional. 7. In order to fur ther improve stopping
ensure braking force, the maximum load Because the locking direction of the lock-up accuracy, the time from the stop signal to
must be set as described below. cylinder is unidirectional, select the locking the operation of the lock should be
direction in accordance with the particular shortened as much as possible.
1. For constant static loads, such as for drop To accomplish this, use a device such as a
prevention: operating conditions. It is also possible to
manufacture a bidirectional lock-up cylinder. highly responsive electric control circuit or
• Fine lock series (Series CLJ2/CLM2/ solenoid valve driven by direct current, and
CLG1) For details, refer to “Made to Order” on page
1989. Due to the nature of its construction, place the solenoid valve as close as
35% or less of the holding force possible to the cylinder.
(maximum static load) a lock-up cylinder has a play of
Note) For applications such as drop approximately 0.5 mm to 1 mm in the axial 8. Be aware that the stopping accuracy is
prevention, consider situations in which direction. Therefore, if an external stopper is influenced by changes in the piston speed.
the air source is shut off, and make used to stop the piston rod and the lock is The variance in the stopping position
selections based on the holding force of engaged, the piston rod will shift in the increases if the piston speed changes,
the spring locked state. Do not use the amount of its axial play. such as due to load fluctuations during the
pneumatic lock for drop prevention reciprocal movement of the piston.
purposes. Therefore, take measures to ensure a
• Lock-up series (Series CL1) constant piston speed immediately
50% or less of the holding force preceding the stopping position.
(maximum static load) Furthermore, the variances in the stopping
position increases when the piston is
effecting a cushioning stroke or during
acceleration after starting its movement.
9. When unlocking is performed, if the thrust
is applied to the piston, unlocking will not
be easily done. To avoid that, ensure that
unlocking should be performed before the
thrust is applied to the piston.
596
Series CL
Mounting Adjustment
Warning Caution
1. Be certain to connect the rod end to the 1. Place it in the locked position. (Excluding
load with the lock released. the series CL1 ø125 to ø160.)
• If this is performed with the lock • The locks are manually disengaged at the CLJ2
engaged, a load that exceeds the time the cylinders are shipped from the
allowable rotational force or holding force factory. Therefore, make sure to change
would be applied to the piston rod, which them to the locked state before using the
CLM2
could damage the locking mechanism. cylinders. For procedures to effect the
The fine lock and Series CL1 with ø40 to change, refer to page 599 for the fine lock CLG1
ø100 cylinders have a built-in manual series. Be aware that the lock will not
unlocking mechanism. Therefore, they operate properly if the change is not
can be maintained in the unlocked state performed correctly. CL1
without supplying air. For Series CL1 with • Adjust the cylinder's air balance. In the
ø125 to ø160 cylinders, simply connect state in which a load is attached to the MLGC
piping to the lock-up port, and supply air cylinder, disengage the lock and adjust
pressure of 0.2 MPa or more to the air pressure at the rod side and the
disengage the lock in order to attach a head side of the cylinder to obtain a load
CNG
load. balance. By maintaining a proper air
balance, the piston rod can be prevented MNB
Caution from lurching when the lock is
disengaged.
1. Do not apply offset loads on the piston rod. CNA
• Pay particular attention to aligning the
center of gravity of the load with the axial
center of the cylinder. If there is a large
2. Adjust the mounting position of detections
such as those of the auto switches. To
CNS
amount of deviation, the piston rod could effect an intermediate stop, adjust the
become unevenly worn or damaged due mounting position of the auto switch CLS
to the inertial moment that is created detection by taking the amount of overrun
when the piston rod is stopped by the into consideration in relation to the desired
lock. stopping position.
CLQ
RLQ
MLU
X Load center of gravity and cylinder MLGP
shaft center are not matched.
ML1C
Load center of gravity and cylinder

shaft center are matched.
Note) Can be used if all of the generated

moment is absorbed by an effective
guide.
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
597
Series CL
Pneumatic Circuit
Warning Caution
1. Be certain to use an pneumatic circuit which will apply 1. A 3 position pressure center solenoid valve and regulator with
balancing pressure to both sides of the piston when in a check valve can be replaced with two 3 port normally open
locked stop. valves and a regulator with relief function.
In order to prevent cylinder lurching after a lock stop, when
restarting or when manually unlocking, a circuit should be used to Cylinder side Cylinder side
which will apply balancing pressure to both sides of the piston,
thereby canceling the force generated by the load in the direction
of piston movement.
2. Use a solenoid valve for unlocking which has a large effective
area, as a rule 50% or more of the effective area of the cylinder
drive solenoid valve.
The larger the effective area is, the shorter the locking time will be
(the overrun amount will be shorter), and stopping accuracy will be
improved. [Example]
3. Place the solenoid valve for unlocking close to the cylinder, 1) [Horizontal]
and no farther than the cylinder drive solenoid valve.
The shorter the distance from the cylinder (the shorter the piping), W
the shorter the overrun amount will be, and stopping accuracy will 3 port
normally open
be improved. SOL.C
4. Allow at least 0.5 seconds from a locked stop (intermediate
stop of the cylinder) until release of the lock. SOL.B
When the locked stop time is too short, the piston rod (and load) Regulator with relief function
may lurch at a speed greater than the control speed of the speed SOL.A
controller. 3 port
normally
5. When restarting, control the switching signal for the unlocking closed
solenoid valve so that it acts before or at the same time as the
cylinder drive solenoid valve. 2) [Vertical]
If the signal is delayed, the piston rod (and load) may lurch at a Load in the direction of Load in the direction of
speed greater than the control speed of the speed controller. rod extension rod retraction
6. Basic circuit W
1) [Horizontal] SOL.C
Forward
SOL.B
W
SOL.A SOL.B SOL.C Action
Backward ON ON OFF Forward SOL.B
Regulator with OFF OFF OFF Locked stop 0.5 s or
more SOL.A SOL.C
check valve ON OFF OFF Unlocked SOL.A
3 port 0 to 0.5 s W
normally ON ON OFF Forward
Pressure
closed center ON OFF ON Backward
SOL.A SOL.C SOL.B OFF OFF OFF Locked stop 0.5 s or
ON OFF OFF Unlocked more
ON OFF ON Backward 0 to 0.5 s
2) [Vertical]
Load in the direction of Load in the direction of
rod extension rod retraction
W
SOL.B SOL.C SOL.A SOL.A SOL.C SOL.B

W
598
Series CL
How to Manually Disengage the Lock and Change from the Unlocked to the Locked State
The lock is manually disengaged at the time the cylinder is shipped from the factory. Because the lock will not operate in
this state, make sure to change it to the locked state before operation, after having adjusted the axial center for
installation.
CLJ2
How to Change from Unlocked to Locked State Manually Unlocking
1. Series CLJ2, CLM2, CLG1 The lock of a fine lock series cylinder can be disengaged manually
CLM2
1) Loose locking nut. through the procedure described below. However, make sure to
2) Turn the wrench flats section of the manual unlocking cam to the disengage the lock pneumatically before operating the cylinder. CLG1
LOCK position that is marked on the cam guide.
3) While keeping the wrench flats section in place, tighten the lock Note) Manual disengagement of the lock could create a greater
nut. cylinder sliding resistance than pneumatic disengagement of CL1
Note) The manual unlocking cam will rotate approximately 180°. Do the lock.
not rotate the wrench flats section excessively.
1. Series CLJ2, CLM2, CLG1
MLGC
Locked state Manually unlocked state 1) Loose locking nut.
Manual
Brake arm Brake spring 2) Supply air pressure of 0.3 MPa or more to the lock release port. CNG
unlocking cam
3) Turn the wrench flats section of the manual unlocking cam until it
Lock nut Brake piston
stops at the FREE position that is marked on the cam guide.
4) While keeping the wrench flats section in place, tighten the lock
MNB
nut.
CNA
CNS
FREE
Cam guide “LOCK” and “FREE” are marked on the cam guide.
CLS
CLQ
RLQ
MLU
MLGP
ML1C
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
599
Prior to Use
Construction Principle/Applicable Series: CLJ2, CLM2, CLG1, MLGC
Spring locking type

Tapered brake piston
Release port
Brake arm Pressurized lock port
Fulcrum A (Plug with breathing hole for spring lock)
Roller
(Rotary axis)
Air pressure
Brake shoe supply Brake spring Air pressure exhaust
Application point C Power point B
Unlocked state Locked state
Spring locking (Exhaust locking)

The spring force that is applied to the tapered brake piston becomes amplified through the wedge
effect. This force becomes further amplified to the power of AB/AC through the mechanical
advantage of a lever and acts on the brake shoe, which in turn, applies a large force to tighten and
lock the piston rod. To disengage the lock, air pressure is supplied through the unlocking port, thus
disengaging the brake spring force.
Pneumatic locking type

Air pressure supply Air pressure exhaust Air pressure exhaust Air pressure supply
Brake piston is operated by air pressure.
Spring and pneumatic locking type

Air pressure supply Air pressure exhaust Air pressure exhaust Air pressure supply
Brake piston is operated by air pressure and spring force.

600
Fine Lock Cylinder
Series CLM2
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order CLJ2

CLM2
CLM2 L 25 100 E
CLG1
With auto switch CDLM2 L 25 100 E M9BW CL1
With auto switch
Type Port thread type
MLGC
(Built-in magnet)
Nil Rc
Made to Order
Nil Pneumatic
Air-hydro TN NPT
Refer to page 612 for details. CNG
H
Number of MNB
Mounting style auto switches
B Basic style T Head side trunnion style Bore size
Nil 2 pcs.
L Axial foot style E Clevis integrated style 20 20 mm
1 pc.
CNA
S
F Rod side flange style BZ Boss-cut basic style 25 25 mm
n “n” pcs.
G Head side flange style FZ Boss-cut flange style 32 32 mm CNS
C Single clevis style 40 40 mm Auto switch
D Double clevis style Nil Without auto switch CLS
Cylinder stroke (mm) ∗ For the applicable auto switch model,
Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 612. refer to the table below.
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model CLQ
With rod boot Lock operation
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto
switch is required, there is no need to enter Nil None E Spring locking (Exhaust locking) RLQ
the symbol for the auto switch. J Nylon tarpaulin P Pneumatic locking (Pressure locking)
(Example) CDLM2F32-100-P K Heat resistant tarpaulin D Spring and pneumatic locking MLU
Load voltage Lead wire length (m) MLGP
Indicator

light

(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N) ML1C
3-wire (NPN) M9N
M9B
Solid state switch
2-wire 12 V —
Connector H7C
Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V G39A IC circuit
Relay,
Yes
conduit 2-wire 24 V 12 V — K39A —

PLC
3-wire (NPN) M9NW
Diagnostic indication 5 V,12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PW
Grommet M9BW
2-wire 12V —
With diagnostic output (2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V H7NF IC circuit
3-wire —
Yes
(NPN equivalent)
Grommet
100 V A93 —
No Yes No Yes No
100 V or less A90 IC circuit

Reed switch
100 V, 200V B54 Relay,

200 V or less B64 — PLC
Connector
12 V — C73C
2-wire 24 V
24 V or less C80C IC circuit
conduit A34A
Yes
100 V, 200 V — Relay,

DIN terminal A44A
PLC
1 m ·······M (Example) M9NWM ∗ D-A9쏔V쏔/M9쏔V쏔/M9쏔WV쏔/M9쏔A(V)L types cannot be mounted.
-X쏔
∗ D-A9쏔/M9쏔/M9쏔W auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (Only auto switch mounting brackets are assembled at the time of shipment.)
611
Series CLM2
Specifications
Provided with a compact lock Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Action
mechanism, it is suitable for Double acting, Single rod
Type Air cylinder
intermediate stop, emergency
Lock operation
stop, and drop prevention. Pneumatic locking (Pressurized locking), Spring and pneumatic locking
Fluid Air
Locking in both directions Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
The piston rod can be locked in either
direction of its cylinder stroke.
Maximum piston speed: Ambient and fluid temperature Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing)
500 mm/s
It can be used at 50 to 500 mm/s provided Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)
that it is within the allowable kinetic energy Piston speed 50 to 500 mm/s ∗
range.
Cushion Rubber bumper (Standard equipment)
Stroke length tolerance +1.4
0
Piping/Screw-in type Rc 1/8 Rc 1/4
Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style, Head
side flange style, Single clevis style, Double clevis style,
Mounting
Head side trunnion style, Clevis integrated style, Boss-
cut basic style, Boss-cut flange style
∗ Constraints associated with the allowable kinetic energy are imposed on the speeds at which the piston can be locked.
The maximum speed of 750 mm/s can be accommodated if the piston is to be locked in the stationary state for the
purpose of drop prevention.
Fine Lock Specifications

Spring locking Spring and Pneumatic locking
Lock operation
(Exhaust locking) pneumatic locking (Pressure locking)
Made to Order Specifications Fluid Air
(For details, refer to page 1836.) Maximum operating pressure 0.5 MPa
Unlocking pressure 0.3 MPa or more 0.1 MPa or more
Lock starting pressure 0.25 MPa or less 0.05 MPa or more
Locking direction Both directions
∗ Refer to page 614 for the allowable kinetic energy when locking, holding force of spring locking and stopping accuracy.
Refer to the minimum auto switch mounting stroke (page 623) for
Standard Stroke / those with an auto switch.
(mm) (mm) (mm)
Rod Boot Material 20 1000
Maximum ambient 25 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150 1500
Symbol Rod boot material
temperature 32 200, 250, 300 2000
J Nylon tarpaulin 70°C 40 2000
K Heat resistant tarpaulin 110°C ∗ Note 1) Intermediate strokes other than listed above are produced upon receipt of order.
Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot itself.
used.)
Note 2) When exceeding 300 strokes, the allowable maximum stroke length is determined
by the stroke selection table (technical data).
Refer to pages 621 to 624 for cylinders
with auto switches.
• Minimum auto switch mounting stroke
• Proper auto switch mounting position
(detection at stroke end) and mounting
height
• Operating range
• Switch mounting bracket: Part no.
612
Fine Lock Cylinder
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CLM2
Mounting Bracket and Accessory Boss-cut style

Accessory Standard equipment Option Boss for the head side cover bracket is eliminated and the
Double(3) Clevis(4) total length of cylinder is shortened.
Mounting Rod end Clevis Single knuckle pivot Rod
Mounting nut nut pin knuckle joint bracket boot
joint
Basic style
Axial foot style
CLJ2
Single clevis style
Double clevis style(3) Comparison of the full length dimension CLM2
Head side trunnion style (Versus standard type) (mm)
Boss-cut basic style ø20 ø25 ø32 ø40 CLG1
Boss-cut flange style
Note With pin With pin CL1
Note 1) Mounting nut is not equipped with clevis integrated style, single clevis
style and double clevis style.
Mounting style
Note 2) Trunnion nuts are attached for head side trunnion style. 쐽 Boss-cut basic style (BZ) 쐽 Boss-cut flange style (FZ) MLGC
Note 3) Pin and retaining ring (ø40: cotter pin) are shipped together with double
clevis and double knuckle joint.
Note 4) Pin and retaining ring are shipped together with clevis pivot bracket. CNG
Mass (kg)
Air-hydro MNB
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Basic style 0.55 0.87 0.94 1.30 CNA
Axial foot style 0.70 1.03 1.10 1.57 CLM2H Mounting style Bore size Stroke Rod boot
Flange style 0.61 0.96 1.03 1.42 Air-hydro CNS
Clevis integrated style 0.53 0.85 0.93 1.26 Low hydraulic cylinder 1 MPa or less
Basic
Single clevis style 0.59 0.91 0.98 1.39 Through the concurrent use of a CC series air-hydro unit, it is possible to
CLS
mass
Double clevis style 0.60 0.93 0.99 1.43 operate at a constant or low speeds or to effect an intermediate stop, just
Trunnion style 0.59 0.94 1.00 1.40

like a hydraulic unit, while using pneumatic equipment such as a valve. CLQ
Boss-cut basic style 0.54 0.85 0.92 1.27
RLQ
Boss-cut flange style 0.60 0.94 1.01 1.39
Additional mass per each 50 mm of stroke 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.13 MLU
Option
bracket
Single knuckle joint 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.23 MLGP
Calculation: (Example) CLM2L32-100-E ML1C
• Basic mass ············· 1.10 (Foot, ø32) Specifications
• Additional mass ······ 0.08/50 stroke
• Cylinder stroke ······· 100 stroke 1.10 + 0.08 x 100/50 = 1.26 kg Fluid Turbine oil (Lock portion is air)
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Axial foot ∗ CM-L020B CM-L032B CM-L040B
Flange CM-F020B CM-F032B CM-F040B
Single clevis CM-C020B CM-C032B CM-C040B Piston speed 15 to 300 mm/s
Double clevis ∗∗ CM-D020B CM-D032B CM-D040B Cushion Rubber bumper (Standard equipment)
Trunnion (with nut) CM-T020B CM-T032B CM-T040B Piping Screw-in type
∗ When ordering foot bracket, order 2 pieces per cylinder. Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style
∗∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring (ø40: cotter pin) are shipped together with Head side flange style, Single clevis style
double clevis style. Mounting
Double clevis style, Head side trunnion style
Clevis integrated style, Boss-cut style
∗ Auto switch capable
• For an exterior dimension diagram to identify the mounting support
types, refer to pages 616 to 620 as the dimensions are identical to those
of standard.
D-쏔
-X쏔
Individual
-X쏔
613
Series CLM2
Caution/Allowable Kinetic Energy when Locking Holding Force of Spring Locking (Maximum static load)
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Allowable kinetic energy (J) 0.26 0.42 0.67 1.19 Holding force (N) 196 313 443 784
1. In terms of specific load conditions, the allowable kinetic energy Note) Holding force at piston rod extended side decreases approximately 15%.
indicated in the table above is equivalent to a 50% load ratio at 0.5
MPa, and a piston speed of 300 mm/sec. Therefore, if the Holding Force of Spring Locking (Maximum static load)
operating conditions are below these values, calculations are ø40
unnecessary.
2. Apply the following formula to obtain the kinetic energy of the load.
Ek: Kinetic energy of load (J) e
1 siz
m: Load mass (kg) 1000 r e
2 Bo
υ: Piston speed (m/s)
3. The piston speed will exceed the average speed immediately
Holding force (N)

before locking. To determine the piston speed for the purpose of
obtaining the kinetic energy of load, use 1.2 times the average ø32
speed as a guide.
4. The relation between the speed and the load of the respective tube
bores is indicated in the diagram below. Use the cylinder in the 500
ø25
range below the line.
5. During locking, the lock mechanism must sustain the thrust of the ø20
cylinder itself, in addition to absorbing the energy of the load.
Therefore, even within a given allowable kinetic energy level, there
is an upper limit to the size of the load that can be sustained. Thus,
a horizontally mounted cylinder must be operated below the solid
line, and a vertically mounted cylinder must be operated below the
dotted line. 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Air pressure applied to pressurized locking port (MPa)
60 ∗ When selecting cylinders, refer to the Precautions and allowable kinetic

ø40 energy when locking on page 596, and then select a cylinder.
50
Caution
Load mass (kg)
40 Caution when Locking

ø32 Holding force is the force which can hold a static load, given no
30 ø40 vibration or impact in a locked state. Therefore, do not use
ø25
cylinders around the maximum holding force. Note the following
points.
20
ø32 • If the piston rod slips because the lock’s holding force has been
ø20
ø25
exceeded, the brake shoe could be damaged, resulting in a
10 ø20 reduced holding force or shortened life.
• Do not use the cylinder in the locked state to sustain a load that
involves impact.
0 50 100 200 300 400 500 • To use the lock for drop prevention purposes, the load to be
Piston speed (mm/s) attached to the cylinder must be within 35% of the cylinder’s
holding force.
Stopping Accuracy (Not including tolerance of control system.) (mm)

Piston speed (mm/s)
Locking method
20 ∗ 50 100 300 500
Spring locking (Exhaust locking) ±0.3 ±0.4 ±0.5 ±1.0 ±2.0
Pneumatic locking (Pressure locking)
±0.15 ±0.2 ±0.3 ±0.5 ±1.5
Spring and pneumatic locking
Conditions: Load: 25% of thrust force at 0.5 MPa

Solenoid valve: Mounted to the lock port
20 mm/s marked with the asterisk is in the case of actuating hydraulically
by means of air-hydro type.
Caution
Recommended Pneumatic Circuit/Caution on Handling
For detailed speceifications of the fine lock cylinder, Series
CLM2 mentioned above, refer to pages 596 to 599.
Accessory
For accessory dimensions, refer to pages 144 and 145 in Best
Pneumatics No. 2, since it is same as Series CM2.
614
Fine Lock Cylinder
Construction (Not able to disassemble)

Spring and pneumatic locking
CLJ2
CLM2
CLG1
CL1
MLGC
CNG
MNB
Pneumatic locking (Pressure locking) CNA
CNS
CLS
CLQ
RLQ
MLU
MLGP
ML1C
Component Parts
1 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 24 Spring washer Steel wire Nickel plated
2 Head cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 25 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
3 Cover Carbon steel Nitrided, chrome plated 26 Spring washer Steel wire Nickel plated
4 Intermediate cover Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 27 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
5 Cylinder tube Stainless steel 28 Spring washer Steel wire Nickel plated
6 Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated 29 Bumper A Urethane
7 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 30 Bumper B Urethane
8 Brake piston Carbon steel Nitrided 31 Wear ring Resin
9 Brake arm Carbon steel Nitrided 32 Wear ring Resin
10 Brake shoe Special friction material 33 Hexagon socket head plug Carbon steel Type E only
11 Roller Carbon steel 34 Element Bronze Type E only
12 Pin Carbon steel 35 Piston seal NBR
13 Retaining ring Carbon tool steel Nickel plated 36 Piston gasket NBR
14 Brake spring Spring steel wire Dacrodized 37 Brake piston seal NBR
15 Bushing Oil-impregnated sintered alloy 38 Rod seal A NBR
16 Bushing Oil-impregnated sintered alloy 39 Rod seal B NBR
17 Retaining ring Carbon tool steel Nickel plated 40 Middle cover gasket A NBR D-쏔
18 Manual lock release cam Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated 41 Middle cover gasket B NBR
19 Cam guide Carbon steel Nitrided, painted 42 Cam gasket NBR -X쏔
20 Lock nut Rolled steel Nickel plated 43 Mounting nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
21 Flat washer Rolled steel Nickel plated 44 Rod end nut Carbon steel Nickel plated Individual
22 Retaining ring Carbon tool steel Nickel plated -X쏔
23 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel Nickel plated
615
Series CLM2
Basic Style (B)
CLM2B Bore size Stroke
Standard style
BQ (Rc, NPT) locking port for pressurizing
BP (Rc, NPT) unlocking port (Plug cap with breathing port at spring lock)
Unlocked when pressurized P (Rc, NPT)
Rod side cylinder port
Manual unlocking cam

Lock nut
P (Rc, NPT) 2 x NN
Width across flats B1 Head side cylinder port
ø
NA
ø
NA
xø
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut style With rod boot
8 8
l
øe
JH
ZZ + Stroke JW f
h
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore (mm) Stroke range A AL B1 B2 BC BN BP BQ BZ D E F GA GB GC GD GK GL GQ GR H H1 H2 I
20 Up to 300 18 15.5 13 26 38 80 18 18 57.5 8 20 – 00.033 13 73.5 8 8 55 3.5 6 4 4 41 5 8 28
25 Up to 300 22 19.5 17 32 45 90 18 18 69 10 26 – 00.033 13 83.5 8 9 64.5 4 9 7 7 45 6 8 33.5
32 Up to 300 22 19.5 17 32 45 90 18 18 69 12 26 – 00.033 13 83.5 8 9 64.5 4 9 7 7 45 6 8 37.5
40 Up to 300 24 21 22 41 52 100.5 18 18 76 14 32 – 00.039 16 90.5 11 8 70 4 11 8 7 50 8 10 46.5
(mm) Boss-cut
Bore (mm) K MM N NA NN P PG PH PL PW S ZZ Bore (mm) ZZ
20 5 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 22 19.5 20 38 127 181 20 168
25 5.5 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 137 195 25 182
32 5.5 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 139 197 32 184
40 7 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 29 24 24 41 167 233 40 217
With Rod Boot (mm)

h l ZZ JH JW
Bore (mm) e f
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 (Reference) (Reference)
20 36 17 68 81 93 106 131 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 208 221 233 246 271 23.5 10.5
25 36 17 72 85 97 110 135 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 222 232 247 260 285 23.5 10.5
32 36 17 72 85 97 110 135 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 224 237 249 262 287 23.5 10.5
40 46 19 77 90 102 115 140 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 260 273 285 298 323 23.5 10.5
616
Fine Lock Cylinder
CLM2L Bore size Stroke (Plug cap with breathing port at spring lock)
BP (Rc, NPT) unlocking port P (Rc, NPT)
Unlocked when pressurized Rod side cylinder port

Lock nut
P (Rc, NPT) CLJ2
Head side cylinder port 2 x NN
CLM2
CLG1
ø
4 x øLD
S + Stroke
CL1
2 x øLC
LS + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke MLGC
(mm)
Bore (mm) Stroke range A AL B B1 B2 BC BN BP BQ BZ
18 18
D F GA GB GC GD GK GL GQ GR H H1 H2 CNG
20 Up to 400 18 15.5 40 13 26 38 80 63.5 8 13 73.5 8 8 55 3.5 6 4 4 41 5 8
25 Up to 450 22 19.5 47 17 32 45 90 18 18 74.5 10 13 83.5 8 9 64.5 4 9 7 7 45 6 8
18 18
MNB
32 Up to 450 22 19.5 47 17 32 45 90 74.5 12 13 83.5 8 9 64.5 4 9 7 7 45 6 8
40 Up to 500 24 21 54 22 41 52 100.5 18 18 80 14 16 90.5 11 8 70 4 11 8 7 50 8 10
CNA
(mm)
Bore (mm) K LC LD LH LS LT LX LZ MM N NA NN P PG PH PL PW S X Y Z ZZ CNS
20 5 4 6.8 25 167 3.2 40 55 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 22 19.5 20 38 127 20 8 21 196
25 5.5 4 6.8 28 177 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 137 20 8 25 210 CLS
32 5.5 4 6.8 28 179 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 139 20 8 25 212
40 7 4 7 30 213 3.2 55 75 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 29 24 24 41 167 23 10 27 250 CLQ
Head Side Flange Style (G) RLQ
CLM2G Bore size Stroke BQ (Rc, NPT) locking port for pressurizing
MLU
(Plug cap with breathing port at spring lock)
Unlocked when pressurized Rod side cylinder port MLGP
ML1C
xø ø40
Mounting holes
Width across
x P (Rc, NPT) Width across flats B2
Lock nut flats B1 Head side cylinder port
ø
ø
Width across flats 쏔NA xø

Mounting holes
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke ø20 to ø32
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore (mm) Stroke range A AL B B1 B2 BC BN BP BQ BZ C1 D E F FD FT FX FY FZ GA GB
20 Up to 300 18 15.5 34 13 26 38 80 18 18 57.5 30 8 20 – 00.033 13 7 4 60 — 75 73.5 8
25 Up to 300 22 19.5 40 17 32 45 90 18 18 69 37 10 26 – 00.033 13 7 4 60 — 75 83.5 8
18 18 0
32 Up to 300 22 19.5 40 17 32 45 90 69 37 12 26 – 0.033 13 7 4 60 — 75 83.5 8
18 18 0
40 Up to 300 24 21 52 22 41 52 100.5 76 47.3 14 32 – 0.039 16 7 5 66 36 82 90.5 11
(mm)
Bore (mm) GC GD GK GL GQ GR H H1 H2 K MM N NA NN P PG PH PL PW S Z ZZ
20 8 55 3.5 6 4 4 41 5 8 5 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 22 19.5 20 38 127 172 181 D-쏔
25 9 64.5 4 9 7 7 45 6 8 5.5 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 137 186 195
32 9 64.5 4 9 7 7 45 6 8 5.5 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 139 188 197 -X쏔
40 8 70 4 11 8 7 50 8 10 7 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 29 24 24 41 167 222 233
Individual
-X쏔
617
Series CLM2
CLM2F Bore size Stroke

BP (Rc, NPT) unlocking port (Plug cap with breathing port at spring lock)
Unlocked when pressurized
P (Rc, NPT)
Rod side cylinder port
4 x øFD
Mounting holes ø40

P (Rc, NPT)
Lock nut Head side cylinder port
ø
NA
ø
2 x øFD NA
ø
Mounting holes
S + Stroke
ø20 to ø32 ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut style
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore (mm) Stroke range A AL B B1 B2 BC BN BP BQ BZ C1 D E F FD FT FX FY FZ GA GB GC GD GK
20 Up to 400 18 15.5 34 13 26 38 80 18 18 57.5 30 8 20 – 00.033 13 7 4 60 — 75 73.5 8 8 55 3.5
25 Up to 450 22 19.5 40 17 32 45 90 18 18 69 37 10 26 – 00.033 13 7 4 60 — 75 83.5 8 9 64.5 4
32 Up to 450 22 19.5 40 17 32 45 90 18 18 69 37 12 26 – 00.033 13 7 4 60 — 75 83.5 8 9 64.5 4
40 Up to 500 24 21 52 22 41 52 100.5 18 18 76 47.3 14 32 – 00.039 16 7 5 66 36 82 90.5 11 8 70 4
(mm) Boss-cut
Bore (mm) GL GQ GR H H1 H2 I K MM N NA NN P PG PH PL PW S Z ZZ Bore (mm) ZZ
20 6 4 4 41 5 8 28 5 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 22 19.5 20 38 127 37 181 20 168
25 9 7 7 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 137 41 195 25 182
32 9 7 7 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 139 41 197 32 184
40 11 8 7 50 8 10 46.5 7 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 29 24 24 41 167 45 233 40 217
618
Fine Lock Cylinder
CLM2C Bore size Stroke BQ (Rc, NPT) locking port for pressurizing

Lock nut
ø
CLJ2
P (Rc, NPT)
ø CLM2
NA
CLG1
ø
ø
S + Stroke
CL1
NA
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke MLGC
(mm)
CNG
Bore (mm) Stroke range A AL B1 BC BN BP BQ BZ CD CX D E F GA GB GC GD GK GL GQ
20 Up to 300 18 15.5 13 38 80 18 18 57.5 9 10 8 20 0
13 73.5 8 8 55 3.5 6 4
25 Up to 300 22 19.5 17 45 90 18 18 69 9 10 10 26
– 0.033
0
13 83.5 8 9 64.5 4 9 7
MNB
– 0.033
0
32 Up to 300 22 19.5 17 45 90 18 18 69 9 10 12 26 13 83.5 8 9 64.5 4 9 7
40 Up to 300 24 21 22 52 100.5 18 18 76 10 15 14 32
– 0.033
0
– 0.039 16 90.5 11 8 70 4 11 8
CNA
Bore (mm) GR H H1 I K L MM N NA NN P PG PH PL PW RR S U Z ZZ CNS
20 4 41 5 28 5 30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 22 19.5 20 38 9 127 14 198 207
25 7 45 6 33.5 5.5 30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 9 137 14 212 221 CLS
32 7 45 6 37.5 5.5 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 9 139 14 214 223
40 7 50 8 46.5 7 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 29 24 24 41 11 167 18 256 267 CLQ
Double Clevis Style (D) RLQ
CLM2D Bore size Stroke BQ (Rc, NPT) locking port for pressurizing
MLU
BP (Rc, NPT) unlocking port P (Rc, NPT) MLGP
ML1C

Lock nut
P (Rc, NPT) ø
ø
NA
ø
ø
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke NA
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore (mm) Stroke range A AL B1 BC BN BP BQ BZ CD CX CZ D E F GA GB GC GD GK GL
20 Up to 300 18 15.5 13 38 80 18 18 57.5 9 10 19 8 20 – 00.033 13 73.5 8 8 55 3.5 6
25 Up to 300 22 19.5 17 45 90 18 18 69 9 10 19 10 26 – 00.033 13 83.5 8 9 64.5 4 9
18 18 0
32 Up to 300 22 19.5 17 45 90 69 9 10 19 12 26 – 0.033 13 83.5 8 9 64.5 4 9
18 18 0
40 Up to 300 24 21 22 52 100.5 76 10 15 30 14 32 – 0.039 16 90.5 11 8 70 4 11
Bore (mm) GQ GR H H1 I K L MM N NA NN P PG PH PL PW RR S U Z ZZ D-쏔

20 4 4 41 5 28 5 30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 22 19.5 20 38 9 127 14 198 207
25 7 7 45 6 33.5 5.5 30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 9 137 14 212 221 -X쏔
32 7 7 45 6 37.5 5.5 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 9 139 14 214 223 Individual
40 8 7 50 8 46.5 7 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 29 24 24 41 11 167 18 256 267 -X쏔
∗ Clevis pin and snap ring (ø40: cotter pin) are shipped together.
619
Series CLM2
CLM2T Bore size Stroke BQ (Rc, NPT) locking port for pressurizing

Lock nut
P (Rc, NPT) Width

Width across flats B1 Head side cylinder port across flats B2
ø
ø
ø
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore (mm) Stroke range A AL B1 B2 BC BN BP BQ BZ D E F GA GB GC GD GK GL GQ
20 Up to 300 18 15.5 13 26 38 80 18 18 57.5 8 20 – 00.033 13 73.5 8 8 55 3.5 6 4
25 Up to 300 22 19.5 17 32 45 90 18 18 69 10 26 – 00.033 13 83.5 8 9 64.5 4 9 7
18 18 0
32 Up to 300 22 19.5 17 32 45 90 69 12 26 – 0.033 13 83.5 8 9 64.5 4 9 7
18 18 0
40 Up to 300 24 21 22 41 52 100.5 76 14 32 – 0.039 16 90.5 11 8 70 4 11 8
Bore (mm) GR H H1 K MM N NA NN P PG PH PL PW S TD TT TX TY TZ Z ZZ
20 4 41 5 5 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 22 19.5 20 38 127 8 10 32 32 52 173 183
25 7 45 6 5.5 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 137 9 10 40 40 60 187 197
32 7 45 6 5.5 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 139 9 10 40 40 60 189 199
40 7 50 8 7 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 29 24 24 41 167 10 11 53 53 77 222.5 233

CLM2E Bore size Stroke

Lock nut
P (Rc, NPT) ø
ø
NA
ø
ø
S + Stroke NA
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore (mm) Stroke range A AL B1 BC BN BP BQ BZ CD CX D E F GA GB GC GD GK GL GQ
20 Up to 300 18 15.5 13 38 80 18 18 57.5 8 12 8 20 – 00.033 13 73.5 8 8 55 3.5 6 4
25 Up to 300 22 19.5 17 45 90 18 18 69 8 12 10 26 – 00.033 13 83.5 8 9 64.5 4 9 7
18 18 0
32 Up to 300 22 19.5 17 45 90 69 10 20 12 26 – 0.033 13 83.5 8 9 64.5 4 9 7
18 18 0
40 Up to 300 24 21 22 52 100.5 76 10 20 14 32 – 0.039 16 90.5 11 8 70 4 11 8
Bore (mm) GR H H1 I K L MM N NA NN P PG PH PL PW RR S U Z ZZ
20 4 41 5 28 5 12 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 18 22 19.5 20 38 9 127 11.5 180 189
25 7 45 6 33.5 5.5 12 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 9 137 11.5 194 203
32 7 45 6 37.5 5.5 15 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 18 27 24 24 41 12 139 14.5 199 211
40 7 50 8 46.5 7 15 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 14 29 24 24 41 12 167 14.5 232 244
620
Series CLM2
I-020B/032B Material: Rolled steel I-040B Material: Free cutting sulfur steel
Y (Max.)
øND MM R1 øND
MM
R1
MM
CLJ2
øE1
øND
NX1 A
øE1
NX
U1 A1 U1
R2
H
Z (Min.) L1 CLM2
A1 U1 NX
L1 A
A CLG1
Applicable
Bore size A H MM NDH10 NX1 U1 R2 Y Z Part no. bore size A A1 E1 L1 MM NDH10 NX R1 U1
20 18 41 M8 x 1.25 9 + 00.058 9 –– 0.1
0.2 14 10 11 66 I-020B 20 46 16 20 36 M8 x 1.25 9 + 00.058 9 –– 0.1
0.2 10 14 CL1
25, 32 22 45 M10 x 1.25 9 + 00.058 9 –– 0.1
0.2 14 10 14 69 I-032B 25, 32 48 18 20 38 M10 x 1.25 9 + 00.058 9 –– 0.1
0.2 10 14
40 24 50 M14 x 1.5 12 + 00.070
–
16 – 0.1
0.3 20 14 13 92 I-040B 40 69 22 24 55 M14 x 1.5 12 + 00.070
–
16 – 0.1
0.3 15.5 20 MLGC
CNG
Y (Max.)
øND hole H10
Axis d9
MM MNB
CNA
NX2 CNS
L A
U2 H
R2 Z (Min.)
CLS

CLQ
+
20 18 41 25 M8 x 1.25 9 9 + 0.2 10 14 11 66
25, 32 22 45 25 M10 x 1.25 9
+
0.1
9 + 0.2
0.1 10 14 14 69
RLQ
40 24 50 49.7 M14 x 1.5 12 16 ++ 0.3 13 25 13 92
0.1
MLU
MLGP
Y-020B/Y-032B Material: Rolled steel Y-040B Material: Cast iron
R1 R1 ML1C
øND hole H10

Axis d9
øE1
øE1
NX
NZ
NX
NZ
L
A1 U1
L1 A1 U1
A L1
A
Applicable Applicable pin Retaining ring
Part no. bore size A A1 E1 L L1 MM ND NX NZ R1 U1 part number Cotter pin size
+
Y-020B 20 46 16 20 25 36 M8 x 1.25 9 9 + 0.2
+
Y-032B 25, 32 48 18 20 25 38 M10 x 1.25 9 9 + 0.2
Y-040B 40 68 22 24 49.7 55 M14 x 1.5 12 16 ++ 0.3
0.1 38 13 25 CDP-3 ø3 x 18 l
∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for 40) are attached.
Bore size/ø20, ø25, ø32 Bore size/ø40 Bore size/ø20, ø25, ø32 Bore size/ø40
2 x ø3 2 x ø3 D-쏔
ø
-X쏔
ø
ø
ø
Individual
-X쏔
ø3 x 18 l ø3 x 18 l
∗ Retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are attached. ∗ Retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are attached.
620-1
Series CLM2
Rod End Nut (mm) Clevis Pivot Bracket (For CLM2E) (mm)
d
L
øD
LV
C
+ LX
LR øLC hole + 0.15
0.05
H B Axis –– 0.040
0.076
Applicable
LH
NT-02 20
LT
13 15.0 12.5 M8 x 1.25 5
NT-03 25, 32 17 19.6 16.5 M10 x 1.25 6
NT-04 40 22 25.4 21.0 M14 x 1.5 8 LF LG
LE 2 x øLD
LY
Mounting Nut (mm) Part no. Applicable L LC LD LE LF LG LH LR LT LX LY LV Applicable pin

bore size part no.
CM-E020B 20, 25 24.5 8 6.8 22 15 30 30 10 3.2 12 59 18.4 CD-S02
d CM-E032B 32, 40 34 10 9 25 15 40 40 13 4 20 75 28 CD-S03
øD
B
H
Clevis Pin (For CLM2E) (mm)
Applicable
Part no. bore size B C D d H Material: Carbon steel
SN-020B 20 26 30 25.5 M20 x 1.5 8
ød
øD
SN-032B 25, 32 32 37 31.5 M26 x 1.5 8
SN-040B 40 41 47.3 40.5 M32 x 2.0 10 m l m
t L
t
Trunnion Nut (mm) Applicable Dd9

Applicable
Part no. d L l m t retaining
H Material: Carbon steel
bore size ring part no.
CD-S02 20, 25 8 –– 0.040
0.076 7.6 24.5 19.5 1.6 0.9 Type C 8 for axis
B
CD-S03 32, 40 10 –– 0.040
0.076 9.6 34 29 1.35 1.15 Type C 10 for axis
Note) Retaining rings are attached.
øC
øD
Applicable
TN-020B 20 26 28 25.5 M20 x 1.5 10
TN-032B 25, 32 32 34 31.5 M26 x 1.5 10
TN-040B 40 41 45 40.5 M32 x 2 10
Regarding mounting bracket, accessory made of stainless steel (Some are not available.), refer to page 1864 for -XB12, External stainless steel cylinder.
620-2
Fine Lock Cylinder
Single Clevis
B° Z + Stroke CX
øCD
°
90
A°
51
40
3.2
ø6.8
CLJ2
20.5
7.5 40 6.8 x 3.4 LX
57 LZ
CLM2
Rotation Angle (mm)
Bore size Mounting Part no. Applicable bore size CX Z + Stroke CD LX LZ
CLG1
A° B° A° + B° + 90°
(mm) 20 198
20 25 85 200
CLM2C
CM-B032 25 10 212 9 44 60
CL1
(Single clevis
25, 32 21 81 192 32 214
40 26 86 202
style)
CM-B040 40 15 256 10 49 65
MLGC
CNG
Head Side Trunnion
MNB
Z + Stroke TX
øCD
CNA
CNS
CLS
51
40
3.2
ø6.8 20.5 CLQ

6.8 x 3.4 LX
7.5 40
57
LZ RLQ
(mm)
Head side trunnion MLU
Mounting Part no. Applicable bore size TX CD LX LZ
Z + Stroke
CM-B020 20 32 173 8 66 82 MLGP
CLM2T 25 187
CM-B032 40 9 74 90 ML1C
(Head side trunnion) 32 189
CM-B040 40 53 222.5 10 87 103
Pivot Bracket Pivot Bracket Pin (For CM2C)

∗ 2 brackets per set
7.5 40 40 7.5
3.4 3.4
ø6
.8 R .8
3. 4
4 3. ø6
6.8
6.8
R
25
25
R
øDd9
3. 4
3.
ød
4
R
17±0.2
17 ±0.2
øCD +0.15 øCD +0.15

11
+0.05 +0.05
11
R
m l m
t L t
40
40
5.2
5.2
3.2
3.2
28 28
(mm)
D-쏔
57 57
Applicable
(mm) Applicable
Part no. Dd9 d L l m t retaining
-X쏔
bore size
Part no. CD ring part no. Individual
CM-B020 (2) 8 20 to 32 CDP-1 9 –0.040
–0.076 8.6 25 19.2 1.75 1.15 Type C 9 for axis -X쏔
Note 1) Pivot brackets do not come with pivot
CM-B032 9 bracket pins and retaining rings. 40 CD-S03 10 –0.040
–0.076 9.6 34 29 1.75 1.15 Type C 10 for axis
CM-B040 10 Note 2) Only for trunnion type Note) Pivot bracket pins come with retaining rings.
620-3
Fine Lock Cylinder
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
D-A9쏔 D-M9쏔
D-M9쏔W
≅ Hs ≅ Hs
8.5 8.5 Auto switch
Auto switch
CLJ2
CLM2
16.5
16.5
A 22 B A 22 B
(24.5)
CLG1
( ): For D-A93
D-C7/C8 D-H7쏔/H7쏔W/H7NF/H7BAL
CL1
≅ Hs ≅ Hs
8.5 Auto switch MLGC
8.5 Auto switch
CNG
16
SMC
SMC
MNB
16
A 26 B A 29 B
CNA
D-B5/B6/B59W D-G5NTL CNS
≅ Hs Auto switch ≅ Hs
12 12 CLS
15
CLQ
24.5
24.5
A 33 6.5 B A 33 B RLQ
Auto switch
MLU
≅ Hs G 1 2 (Applicable cable O.D. ø6.8 to ø11.5)
MLGP
G 1 2 (Applicable cable O.D. ø6.8 to ø9.6)
49 49 ML1C
A 36 B A 36 B
Auto switch
Auto switch
D-A44A D-H7C
≅ Hs Auto switch ≅ Hs
8.5 Auto switch
49.5
16
SMC
SMC
A 36 B A 38.2 B
G 1 2 (Applicable cable O.D. ø6.8 to ø11.5)
D-C73C/C80C
≅ Hs
8.5 Auto switch
D-쏔
16
-X쏔
SMC
SMC
A 36.7 B Individual
-X쏔
621
Series CLM2
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (mm)

Auto switch
model
D-H7첸
D-C7첸 D-A3첸A
D-M9첸 D-H7C
D-B5첸 D-C80 D-G39A
D-A9첸 D-B59W D-H7첸W D-G5NTL
D-M9첸W D-B64 D-C73C D-K39A
D-H7BAL
D-C80C D-A44A
D-H7NF
Bore size
(mm) A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
20 6.5 5.5 10.5 9.5 1 0 7 6 4 3 0.5 0 6 5 2.5 1.5
25 6.5 5.5 10.5 9.5 1 0 7 6 4 3 0.5 0 6 5 2.5 1.5
32 7.5 6.5 11.5 10.5 2 1 8 7 5 4 1.5 0.5 7 6 3.5 2.5
40 13.5 11.5 17.5 15.5 7 6 13 12 10 9 6.5 5.5 12 11 8.5 7.5
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.

Auto switch D-C7첸
model D-B5첸
D-A9첸 D-C80
D-B64 D-A3첸A
D-H7첸 D-C73C
D-M9첸 D-B59W D-G39A D-A44A
D-H7첸W D-C80C
D-M9첸W D-G5NTL D-K39A
D-H7BAL
D-H7C
D-H7NF
Bore size
(mm) Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs
20 22 25.5 22.5 25 60 69.5
25 24.5 28 25 27.5 62.5 72
32 28 31.5 28.5 31 66 75.5
40 32 35.5 32.5 35 70 79.5
622
Fine Lock Cylinder
n: No. of auto switches (mm)
No. of auto switches mounted
Auto switch
2 n
model 1
D-A9첸 (n – 2)
15 + 45
D-M9첸 10 15 Note 1) 45 Note 1) 2 45 + 45 (n – 2)
D-M9첸W (n = 2, 4, 6···)
D-C7첸 10 15 50
15 + 45
(n – 2)
2 50 + 45 (n – 2)
CLJ2
D-C80 (n = 2, 4, 6···)
CLM2
D-H7첸 (n – 2)
15 + 45
D-H7첸W 10 15 60 2 60 + 45 (n – 2)
D-H7BAL/H7NF (n = 2, 4, 6···)
CLG1
D-C73C
15 + 50
(n – 2) CL1
D-C80C 10 15 65 2 65 + 50 (n – 2)
D-H7C (n = 2, 4, 6···)
MLGC
(n – 2)
D-B5첸/B64 15 + 50
10 15 75 2 75 + 55 (n – 2)
D-G5NTL (n = 2, 4, 6···) CNG
20 + 50
(n – 2)
75 + 55 (n – 2)
MNB
D-B59W 15 20 75 2
(n = 2, 4, 6···)
CNA
D-A3첸A/G39A 10 35 100 35 + 30 (n – 2) 100 + 100 (n – 2)
D-K39A/A44A
CNS
Note 1) Auto switch mounting (The adjustment as shown in the figures below is required with the following stroke ranges.)
With 2 auto switches CLS
Different surfaces Note 1) Same surface Note 1)
A CLQ
A-6 6
15
RLQ
MLU
Auto switch model
MLGP
Auto switch
D-M9첸
6 B-6 ML1C
B
D-M9첸W
D-A93 — 45 to less than 50 stroke

D-M9첸
15 to less than 20 stroke 45 to less than 55 stroke
D-M9첸W
Operating Range
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
Auto switch model
20 25 32 40
D-A9첸 6 6 6 6
D-M9첸
3.5 3 3.5 3
D-M9첸W
D-C7첸/C80
7 8 8 8
D-C73C/C80C
D-B5첸/B64
D-A3첸A/A44A
8 8 9 9 D-쏔
D-B59W 12 12 13 13
-X쏔
D-H7첸/H7첸W/H7BAL
4 4 4.5 5
D-G5NTL/H7NF Individual
D-H7C 7 8.5 9 10
∗ Since the operating range is provided as a guideline including hysteresis, -X쏔
it cannot be guaranteed (assuming approximately ± 30% dispersion). It
D-G39A/K39A 8 9 9 9 may vary substantially depending on an ambient environment.
623
Series CLM2
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket: Part No.
Bore size (mm)

Auto switch model
ø20 ø25 ø32 ø40
D-A9첸 q BM2-020 (1) q BM2-025 (1) q BM2-032 (1) q BM2-040 (1)

D-M9첸
w BJ3-1 w BJ3-1 w BJ3-1 w BJ3-1
D-M9첸W
D-C7첸/C80
D-C73C/C80C
D-H7첸 BM2-020 BM2-025 BM2-032 BM2-040
D-H7첸W
D-H7BAL
D-H7NF
D-B5첸/B64
D-B59W BA2-020 BA2-025 BA2-032 BA2-040
D-G5NTL
D-G5NBL
D-A3첸A/A44A BM3-020 BM3-025 BM3-032 BM3-040
D-G39A/K39A
Note 1) Two kinds of auto switch mounting brackets are used as a set.
[Mounting screw set made of stainless steel]

The following set of mounting screws made of stainless steel is available. Use it in accordance with the
operating environment. (Please order the auto switch mounting bracket separately, since it is not included.)
BBA4: For D-C7/C8/H7 types
Note 2) Refer to page 1814 for the details of BBA4.
D-H7BAL auto switch is set on the cylinder with the stainless steel screws above
when shipped. When an auto switch is shipped independently, BBA4 is attached.
e
Switch spacer
(Stainless steel)
d
Switch holder
(Resin)
Auto switch
b
c Auto switch mounting screw Set screw (Not used)
Switch bracket
(Stainless steel)
q BM-2쏔쏔쏔: A set of a and b in the figures.

w BJ3-1: A set of c, d and e in the figures.
a
Besides the models listed in How to Order, the following auto switches are applicable.
Refer to pages 1719 to 1827 for the detailed specifications.
Auto switch type Part no. Electrical entry (Fetching direction) Features
D-B53, C73, C76 —
Reed
Solid state D-H7NW, H7PW, H7BW Diagnostic indication (2-color)
D-G5NTL With timer
∗ For solid state auto switches, auto switches with a pre-wired connector are also available. Refer to pages 1784 and 1785 for details.
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact) solid state auto switches (D-F9G/F9H types) are also available. Refer to page 1746 for details.
∗ Wide range detection type, solid state auto switches (D-G5NBL type) are also available. Refer to page 1776 for details.
624
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1148
Low Speed Cylinder

Series CM2X
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order
Mounting style
B Basic style T Head side trunnion style
FZ flange style
C Single clevis style Refer to "Standard Stroke" on page 1149.
UZ trunnion style
U Rod side trunnion style
CM2X L 40 150
With auto switch CDM2X L 40 150 M9BW
With auto switch Number of auto switches
Thread type
(Built-in magnet) Nil 2 pcs.
Nil Rc
S 1 pc.
Low speed cylinder TN NPT
Bore size n n pcs.
TF G
25 25 mm Auto switch
switch is required, there is no need to enter 32 32 mm Nil Without auto switch
the symbol for the auto switch. ∗ For the applicable auto switch
(Example) CDM2XF32-100 40 40 mm
model, refer to the table below.
Indicator light
Load voltage Lead wire (m)

Electrical Wiring Auto switch Pre-wired Applicable
Type Special function entry (Output) 0.5 1 3 5 None connector
DC AC model load
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9N —
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9P —
Solid state switch
M9B —
2-wire 12 V —
Connector H7C — —
Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V G39A — — — — — IC circuit Relay,
conduit Yes 2-wire
24 V
12 V
—
K39A — — — — — — PLC
Diagnostic 3-wire (NPN) M9NW —
indication 3-wire (PNP) M9PW —
Grommet
(2-color) 2-wire 12 V M9BW — —
With diagnostic output (2-color) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V H7NF — IC circuit
3-wire
— 5V — A96 — — — — IC circuit —
Yes (Equiv. NPN)
100 V A93 — — — — —
Grommet
No A90 100 V or less — — — — IC circuit
Reed switch
Yes B54 100 V, 200 V —

Relay, — —
No B64 200 V or less — — PLC — — —
Yes 12 V C73C — — —
Connector 2-wire 24 V
No C80C 24 V or less —
IC circuit —
Terminal A33A — — — — PLC— —
conduit A34A — — — — —
Yes 100 V, 200 V — Relay,
DIN terminal A44A — — — — —
PLC
Diagnostic indication (2-color) Grommet — — B59W — — — —
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ············ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m ············ M (Example) M9NWM ∗ D-A9V/M9V/M9WV/M9A(V)L types cannot be mounted.
3 m ············ L (Example) M9NWL ∗ Do not add the suffix (N) indicating “no lead wire” to the part numbers of models D-A3A,
5 m ············ Z (Example) M9NWZ A44A, G39A and K39A.
None ········· N (Example) H7CN
∗ In addition to the models in the above table, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For more information, refer to page 1161.
∗ Refer to pages 1784 and 1785 for details of auto switches with a pre-wired connector.
∗ D-A9/M9/M9W auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (Only auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipped.)
1148
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1149
Low Speed Cylinder

Double Acting, Single Rod Series CM2X
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40

Type Pneumatic
Fluid Air
JIS Symbol Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Double acting
Single rod
Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing)
Standard Stroke Stroke length tolerance +1.4 mm
0
Bore size
(mm)
Standard stroke (mm) Piston Speed
20
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
25 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
200, 250, 300 Piston speed (mm/s) 0.5 to 300
32
40
∗ Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is
possible. (Spacers are not used.)
Precautions
Minimum Bore size (mm) Description (when ordering
Mounting bracket
Be sure to read before handling. order 20 25 32 40 a minimum number)
Refer to front matters 42 and 43 for Axial foot∗ 2 CM-L020B CM-L032B CM-L040B Foot 2 pcs., Mounting nut 1 pc.
Safety Instructions and pages 3 to Flange 1 CM-F020B CM-F032B CM-F040B Flange 1 pc., Mounting nut 1 pc.
11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Single clevis∗∗ 1 CM-C020B CM-C032B CM-C040B Single clevis 1 pc., Liner 3 pcs.
∗∗ Double clevis 1 pc., Liner 3 pcs.,
Precautions. Double clevis (with pin) ∗∗∗ 1 CM-D020B CM-D032B CM-D040B
Clevis pin 1 pc., Retaining ring 2 pcs.
Trunnion 1 pc.,
Trunnion (with nut) 1 CM-T020B CM-T032B CM-T040B
Operating Precautions Trunnion nut 1 pc.
∗ When ordering foot brackets, order 2 pieces per cylinder unit.
Warning ∗∗ Three liners are included in the clevis bracket for adjusting an angle when mounting it.
1. Do not rotate the cover. ∗∗∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for ø40) are shipped together.
• When installing a cylinder or screwing a pipe
fitting into the port, the coupling portion of the REA
cover could break if the cover rotated. Mounting Style and Accessory
Accessory Standard equipment Option REB
Caution
Mounting Rod end Clevis Single Double (3) Clevis (4)
1. Be careful of the retaining ring to pop out.
• When replacing the rod seal, take care that the nut nut pin
knuckle knuckle
joint joint bracket REC
Mounting
retaining ring does not spring out while you are Basic style (1 pc.) — —
removing it.

CY
Axial foot style (2) — —
Maintenance Rod side flange style (1) — — CX
Head side flange style (1) — —
Caution Clevis integrated style — Note 1) — MQ
1. Replacement parts/Seal kit Single clevis style — Note 1) — —
Order it in accordance with the bore size.
Double clevis style (3) — Note 1) Note 5) —
RHC
Bore size Kit no. Contents Rod side trunnion style (1)Note 2) — —
(mm) RZQ
20 CM2X20-PS Head side trunnion style (1)Note 2) — —
Rod seal: 1 pc. Boss-cut basic style (1) — —
25 CM2X25-PS
32 CM2X32-PS Grease pack (10 g): 1 pc. Boss-cut flange style (1) — —
40 CM2X40-PS Boss-cut trunnion style (1) — — D-
2. Grease pack Note 1) Mounting nut is not equipped with clevis integrated style, single clevis style and double clevis style.
When maintenance requires only grease, Note 2) Trunnion nuts are attached for rod side trunnion and head side trunnion styles. -X
use the following part numbers to order. Note 3) Pin and retaining ring are shipped together with double clevis and double knuckle joint. (ø40 is
Grease pack part no.: cotter pin.) Individual
GR-L-005 (5 g) Note 4) Pins and retaining rings are packed with clevis brackets. -X
GR-L-010 (10 g) Note 5) Retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are included in the clevis pins.
GR-L-150 (150 g)
1149
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1150
Series CM2X
Basic Style (B)

CM2XB Bore size Stroke
G
ø
2 x øEh8
NA
øD

AL 2 x FL NA
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut style
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
0
20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 116
0
25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 120
0
32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 122
0
40 24 21 22 41 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 154
Boss-cut Style (mm)

Bore size (mm) ZZ
20 103
25 107
32 109
40 138

CM2XL Bore size Stroke
H
A K F G 2xP
øD
øI
2 x øLC
LH
4 x øLD
MM Width across flats NA N
N
Width across flats B2 Y X S + Stroke X Y LX
LT
Z LS + Stroke LZ
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
20 18 15.5 40 13 26 8 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 4 6.8 25 102 3.2 40 55 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 20 8 21 131
25 22 19.5 47 17 32 10 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 4 6.8 28 102 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 20 8 25 135
32 22 19.5 47 17 32 12 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 4 6.8 28 104 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 20 8 25 137
40 24 21 54 22 41 14 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 4 7 30 134 3.2 55 75 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 23 10 27 171
1150
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1151
Low Speed Cylinder


CM2XF Bore size Stroke
H2 G 2xP G
(Rc, NPT, G)
C2
FY
øD
øI
B
øE
2 x øFD FX MM Effective thread length
Mounting hole AL Width across flats NA 1.5
ø40 FZ Width across 2 x FL
A K FT N
flats KA
ø20 to ø32 Z N
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut style
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 C2 D E F FL FD FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I K KA MM N NA NN P S Z ZZ
0
20 18 15.5 34 13 26 30 20 –0.033 13 10.5
8 7 4 60 — 75 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 37 116
0
25 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 41 120
0
32 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 41 122
0
40 24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 7 5 66 36 82 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 45 154
Boss-cut Style (mm)

Bore size (mm) ZZ
20 103
25 107
32 109
40 138

REA
CM2XG Bore size Stroke
REB
H2 Width across flats B2 2 x øFD 4 x øFD
Width across flats B1 H1 2 x NN G 2xP G
Mounting hole Mounting REC
C2
(Rc, NPT, G) hole
CY
FY
øD
B
øI
øE
MM FX
CX
AL Width across flats NA N
Width across A K F N FZ ø40
flats KA H S + Stroke FT
ø20 to ø32
MQ
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
RHC
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 C2 D E
0
F FL FD FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I RZQ
20 18 15.5 34 13 26 30 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 41 5 8 28
0
25 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 33.5
0
32 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 37.5
40 24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 0
32 –0.039 16 13.5 7 5 66 36 82 11 50 8 10 46.5 D-
Bore size (mm) K KA MM N NA NN P S Z ZZ -X

20 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 107 116 Individual
25 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 111 120 -X
32 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 113 122
40 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 143 154
1151
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1152
Series CM2X

CM2XC Bore size Stroke
Effective thread length FL øCD

Width across flats B1 H1 NN G
G 2xP
(Rc, NPT, G) øI
NA
øCI
øD
øE
MM AL CX
Width across flats KA A K F N N U NA
H S + Stroke L
Z + Stroke RR
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CI CD CX D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN P RR S U Z ZZ
0
20 18 15.5 13 24 9 10 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 9 62 14 133 142
0
25 22 19.5 17 30 9 10 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 9 62 14 137 146
0
32 22 19.5 17 30 9 10 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 9 64 14 139 148
0
40 24 21 22 38 10 15 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 11 88 18 177 188

CM2XD Bore size Stroke
+0.058
–0.040 CL
Width across flats B1 H1 NN G 2xP G Axis d9 –0.076
(Rc, NPT, G) øI
NA
øCI
øD
øE
MM AL N U CX
H S + Stroke L NA
Z + Stroke RR
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CD CI CL CX CZ D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN P RR S U Z ZZ
0
20 18 15.5 13 9 24 25 10 19 8 20–0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 9 62 14 133 142
0
25 22 19.5 17 9 30 25 10 19 10 26–0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 9 62 14 137 146
0
32 22 19.5 17 9 30 25 10 19 12 26–0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 9 64 14 139 148
0
40 24 21 22 10 38 41.2 15 30 14 32–0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 11 88 18 177 188
∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for bore size ø40) are shipped together.
1152
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1153
Low Speed Cylinder


CM2XU Bore size Stroke
G 2xP G 2 x NN
øTD
øD
øTY
øI
øE
TX AL Width across flats NA
TZ Width across flats KA A K TT 2 x FL
Z N N
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut style
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 I K KA MM N NA NN P
0
20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
0
25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
0
32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
0
40 24 21 22 41 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
(mm)
Bore size (mm) S TD TT TX TY TZ Z ZZ
20 62 8 10 32 32 52 36 116
25 62 9 10 40 40 60 40 120
32 64 9 10 40 40 60 40 122
40 88 10 11 53 53 77 44.5 154
Boss-cut Style (mm)

Bore size (mm) ZZ
20 103
25 107
32 109 REA
40 138
REB
REC
CY
CX
MQ
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1153
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1154
Series CM2X

CM2XT Bore size Stroke

G Width across flats B2
2 x NN G 2xP
øTD
øTY
øD
øI
øE
MM AL Width across flats NA TX

Width across flats KA A K F N N TZ
H S + Stroke TT
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
0
20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
0
25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
0
32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
0
40 24 21 22 41 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
(mm)
20 62 8 10 32 32 52 108 118
25 62 9 10 40 40 60 112 122
32 64 9 10 40 40 60 114 124
40 88 10 11 53 53 77 143.5 154
1154
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1155
Low Speed Cylinder


CM2XE Bore size Stroke
LZ + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Z + Stroke LP
H S + Stroke L RR
A K F N N U NA
AL G 2xP G øCD CX
H1 (Rc, NPT, G)
øI
NA
øCI
øD
øE
LH
MM 2 x øLD
Width across flats KA Effective thread length FL
LF LG
LT LY LV
of clevis pivot bracket.
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CD CI CX D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN
0
20 18 15.5 13 8 20 12 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 12 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
0
25 22 19.5 17 8 22 12 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 12 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
0
32 22 19.5 17 10 27 20 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 15 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
0
40 24 21 22 10 33 20 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 15 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
(mm)
Bore size (mm) P RR S U Z ZZ
20 9 62 11.5 115 124
25 9 62 11.5 119 128
32 12 64 14.5 124 136
40 12 88 14.5 153 165
REA
REB
REC
CY
CX
MQ
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1155
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1156
Series CM2X
I-020B, 032B Material: Rolled steel I-040B Material: Free cutting sulfur steel
Y (Max.)
ø ø
ø
ø
(Min.)
Applicable bore
Bore size (mm) A H MM NDH10 NX1 U1 R2 Y Z Part no. size (mm) A A1 E1 L1 MM NDH10 NX R1 U1
+0.058 –0.1 +0.058 –0.1
20 18 41 M8 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 14 10 11 66 I-020B 20 46 16 20 36 M8 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 10 14
+0.058 –0.1 +0.058 –0.1
25, 32 22 45 M10 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 14 10 14 69 I-032B 25, 32 48 18 20 38 M10 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 10 14
+0.070 –0.1 +0.070 –0.1
40 24 50 M14 x 1.5 12 0 16 –0.3 20 14 13 92 I-040B 40 69 22 24 55 M14 x 1.5 12 0 16 –0.3 15.5 20
øND hole H10

Y (Max.)
Axis d9
(Min.)
Bore size (mm) A H L MM ND NX2 R2 U2 Y Z

+0.2
20 18 41 25 M8 x 1.25 9 9 +0.1 10 14 11 66
+0.2
25, 32 22 45 25 M10 x 1.25 9 9 +0.1 10 14 14 69
+0.3
40 24 50 49.7 M14 x 1.5 12 16 +0.1 13 25 13 92
Y-020B, Y-032B Material: Rolled steel Y-040B Material: Cast iron
øND hole H10

øND hole H10 Axis d9
Axis d9
ø
Applicable bore Applicable pin Retaining ring

Part no. size (mm) A A1 E1 L L1 MM ND NX NZ R1 U1 part number Cotter pin size
+0.2
Y-020B 20 46 16 20 25 36 M8 x 1.25 9 9 +0.1 18 5 14 CDP-1 Type C 9 for axis
+0.2
Y-032B 25, 32 48 18 20 25 38 M10 x 1.25 9 9 +0.1 18 5 14 CDP-1 Type C 9 for axis
+0.3
Y-040B 40 68 22 24 49.7 55 M14 x 1.5 12 16 +0.1 38 13 25 CDP-3 ø3 x 18l
∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for ø40) are attached.
Bore size: ø20, ø25, ø32 Bore size: ø40 Bore size: ø20, ø25, ø32 Bore size: ø40
2 x ø3 2 x ø3
ø
ø
ø
ø
ø
ø3 x 18l ø3 x 18l
∗ Retaining rings (copper pins for ø40) are included. ∗ Retaining rings (copper pins for ø40) are included.
1156
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1157
Low Speed Cylinder

Rod End Nut (mm) Clevis Pivot Bracket (For CM2XE) (mm)
ø Material: Carbon steel Material: Rolled steel plate
øLC hole
Axis
Applicable bore
Part no. size (mm) B C D d H
NT-02 20 13 15.0 12.5 M8 x 1.25 5
NT-03 25, 32 17 19.6 16.5 M10 x 1.25 6
NT-04 40 22 25.4 21.0 M14 x 1.5 8
2 x øLD
Mounting Nut (mm) Part no. Applicable bore L LC LD LE LF LG LH LR LT LX LY LV Applicable pin

size (mm) part no.
CM-E020B 20, 25 24.5 8 6.8 22 15 30 30 10 3.2 12 59 18.4 CD-S02
CM-E032B 32, 40 34 10 9 25 15 40 40 13 4 20 75 28 CD-S03
Note 1) Clevis bracket pins and retaining rings are included.
ø
Clevis Pin (For CM2XE) (mm)

Applicable bore
Part no. size (mm) B C D d H Material: Carbon steel
SN-020B 20 26 30 25.5 M20 x 1.5 8
SN-032B 25, 32
ø
32 37 31.5 M26 x 1.5 8
ø
SN-040B 40 41 47.3 40.5 M32 x 2.0 10 l
Trunnion Nut (mm) Applicable bore Applicable

Part no. Dd9 d L l m t retaining ring
Material: Carbon steel size (mm) part no.
CD-S02 20, 25 8 –0.040
–0.076 7.6 24.5 19.5 1.6 0.9 Type C 8 for axis
CD-S03 32, 40 10 –0.040
–0.076 9.6 34 29 1.35 1.15 Type C 10 for axis
Note) Retaining rings are included.
ø
ø
Applicable bore
TN-020B 20 26 28 25.5 M20 x 1.5 10
TN-032B 25, 32 32 34 31.5 M26 x 1.5 10
TN-040B 40 41 45 40.5 M32 x 2 10 REA
REB
REC
Regarding mounting bracket, accessory made of stainless steel (Some are not available.), refer to page 1864 for -XB12, External stainless steel cylinder. CY
CX
MQ
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1157
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1158
Series CM2X
D-A9 D-M9
D-M9W
≅ Hs ≅Hs
Auto switch Auto switch
16.5
16.5
A 22 B A 22 B
(24.5)
( ): For D-A93 type
D-C7/C8 D-H7/H7W/H7NF
≅Hs ≅Hs
Auto switch
Auto switch
≅Hs ≅Hs
Auto switch
Auto switch
≅Hs G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D. ≅Hs G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D.
ø6.8 to ø9.6) ø6.8 to ø9.6)
D-A44A D-H7C
≅Hs Auto switch Auto switch

≅Hs
G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D.

ø6.8 to ø11.5)
D-C73C/C80C
Auto switch
≅Hs
1158
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1159
Low Speed Cylinder

Auto switch
model D-C7 D-A3A D-H7
D-M9 D-B5 D-C80 D-G39A D-H7C
D-A9 D-B59W D-G5NTL
D-M9W D-B64 D-C73C D-K39A D-H7W
D-C80C D-A44A D-H7NF
Bore size
20 6.5 5.5 10.5 9.5 1 0 7 6 4 3 0.5 0 6 5 2.5 1.5
25 6.5 5.5 10.5 9.5 1 0 7 6 4 3 0.5 0 6 5 2.5 1.5
32 7.5 6.5 11.5 10.5 2 1 8 7 5 4 1.5 0.5 7 6 3.5 2.5
40 13.5 11.5 17.5 15.5 7 6 13 12 10 9 6.5 5.5 12 11 8.5 7.5

Auto switch
model D-B5 D-C7
D-A9 D-B64 D-C80 D-A3A
D-C73C
D-M9 D-B59W D-H7 D-G39A D-A44A
D-C80C
D-M9W D-G5NTL D-H7W D-K39A
D-H7C D-H7NF
Bore size
20 22 25.5 22.5 25 60 69.5
25 24.5 28 25 27.5 62.5 72
32 28 31.5 28.5 31 66 75.5
40 32 35.5 32.5 35 70 79.5
REA
REB
REC
CY
CX
MQ
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1159
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1160
Series CM2X

Auto switch model 2 pcs. n pcs.
1 pc.
D-A9 15 + 45
(n-2)
D-M9 10 15 Note) 45 Note) 2 45 + 45 (n-2)
D-M9W (n = 2, 4, 6···)
(n-2)
D-C7 15 + 45
10 15 50 2 50 + 45 (n-2)
D-C80 (n = 2, 4, 6···)
D-H7 15 + 45
(n-2)
D-H7W 10 15 60 2 60 + 45 (n-2)
D-H7NF (n = 2, 4, 6···)
D-C73C 15 + 50
(n-2)
D-C80C 10 15 65 2 65 + 50 (n-2)
D-H7C (n = 2, 4, 6···)
(n-2)
D-B5/B64 15 + 50
10 15 75 2 75 + 55 (n-2)
D-G5NTL (n = 2, 4, 6···)
(n-2)
20 + 50
D-B59W 15 20 75 2 75 + 55(n-2)
(n = 2, 4, 6···)
D-A3A/G39A 10 35 100 35 + 30(n-2) 100 + 100 (n-2)

D-K39A/A44A
Note) When 2 D-A93/M9/M9W auto switches are included.

Different surfaces Same surface
A
A–6 6 15
Auto switch model
Auto switch
D-M9 6 B–6
D-M9W B
D-A93 — Less than 50 strokes
D-M9
Less than 20 strokes Less than 55 strokes
D-M9W
Operating Range
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
Auto switch model
20 25 32 40
D-A9 6 6 6 6
D-M9
3.5 3 3.5 3
D-M9W
D-C7/C80
7 8 8 8
D-C73C/C80C
D-B5/B64
8 8 9 9
D-A3A/A44A
D-B59W 12 12 13 13 ∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis,
D-H7/H7W not meant to be guaranteed. (Assuming
4 4 4.5 5 approximately ±30% dispersion)
D-G5NTL/H7NF
There may be the case it will vary
D-H7C 7 8.5 9 10 substantially depending on an ambient
D-G39A/K39A 8 9 9 9 environment.
1160
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1161
Low Speed Cylinder

Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Part No.
Bore size (mm)

Auto switch model
ø20 ø25 ø32 ø40
D-A9 Note) Note) Note) Note)

D-M9 qBM2-020 qBM2-025 qBM2-032 qBM2-040
D-M9W wBJ3-1 wBJ3-1 wBJ3-1 wBJ3-1
D-C7/C80
D-C73C/C80C
D-H7 BM2-020 BM2-025 BM2-032 BM2-040
D-H7W
D-H7NF
D-B5/B64
D-B59W BA2-020 BA2-025 BA2-032 BA2-040
D-G5NTL
D-G5NBL
D-A3A/A44A BM3-020 BM3-025 BM3-032 BM3-040
D-G39A/K39A
Note) Two kinds of auto switch mounting brackets are used as a set.
e
Switch spacer
(Stainless steel)
d
Switch holder
(Resin)
Auto switch
c
Set screw (not used)
Switch bracket
(Stainless steel)
b
Auto switch mounting screw
q BM2-: A set of a and b in the figures.

w BJ3-1: A set of c, d and e in the figures.
a
REA
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted.
For detailed specifications, refer to pages 1719 to 1827.
REB
Auto switch type Model Electrical entry (Direction) Features
REC
D-B53, C73, C76 —
Reed
CY
Solid state D-H7NW, H7PW, H7BW Diagnostic indication (2-color indication)
CX
D-G5NTL With timer
∗ With pre-wired connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1784 to 1785.
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state auto switches (D-F9G, F9H type) are also available. For details, refer to page 1746.
MQ
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1161
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1162
Series 10-, 11-CQSX, CQ2X

Clean Series Low Speed Cylinder Series 10-, 11-
The type which is applicable for using inside the clean room graded Class 100 by making an actuator’s rod
section a double seal construction and discharging by relief port directly to the outside of clean room.
Since the external dimensions and applicable auto switches are the same as standard type, refer to the
separate catalog of “Pneumatic Clean Series”.
Series 10-, 11-CQSX Series 10-, 11-CQ2X
How to Order How to Order
Clean Series Clean Series
10 Relief type 10 Relief type
11 Vacuum type 11 Vacuum type
10 C(D)QSX B 20 30 D M9BW 10 C(D)Q2XB 40 30 D J79W

With auto switch With auto switch
(Built-in magnet) (Built-in magnet)
Low speed cylinder Low speed cylinder

Mounting style Bore size
Through-hole/Both ends 32 32 mm
B Number of
tapped common (Standard) 40 40 mm
auto switches Number of
Bore size Nil 2 pcs.
50 50 mm auto switches
12 12 mm S 1 pc.
63 63 mm Nil 2 pcs.
16 16 mm n “n” pcs. S 1 pc.
Port thread type n
20 20 mm “n” pcs.
Nil Rc
TN NPT ø32 to ø100
Cylinder stroke (mm) Without auto switch
Nil TF G
(Built-in magnet)
Bore size Standard stroke ∗ Without auto switch, ø32, 5 strokes:
(mm) (mm) ∗ For the applicable auto M thread
switch model, refer to
12, 16 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 page 1129.
20 5, 10, 15, 20, 25,
∗ Auto switches are Cylinder stroke (mm)
shipped together, (but not
25 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 assembled). Action
Manufacturing of Intermediate stroke
Intermediate strokes by the 1 mm interval Rod end thread D Double acting
are available by using spacers with Nil Standard (Rod end female thread)
standard stroke cylinders. The overall
M Rod end male thread
Standard stroke
length of cylinder will be the same as the
standard stroke with a longer one. Bore size Standard stroke Auto switch
Example) 3 mm width spacer is installed in Action (mm) (mm) Without auto switch
the standard cylinder 10- D Double acting Nil
CQSXB25-50D to make 10- 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, (Built-in magnet)
CQSXB25-47D.
32, 40 35, 40, 45, 50, 75, 100 ∗ For the applicable auto
10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, switch model, refer to
Specifications 50, 63 40, 45, 50, 75, 100
page 1136.
Bore size 10- (Relief type) ∗ Auto switches are
(mm) Manufacturing of Intermediate stroke shipped together, (but
12 16 20 25 not assembled).
Intermediate strokes by the 1 mm interval
Fluid Air
are available by using spacers with
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa standard stroke cylinders. But, as for ø40 Rod end thread
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa with damper, please consult SMC
Minimum operating pressure 0.04 MPa 0.035 MPa separately. Nil Standard (Rod end female thread)
Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C Example) 18 mm width spacer is installed M Rod end male thread
Ambient and fluid temperature in the standard cylinder 10-
With auto switch: –10 to 60°C CQ2XB40-75D to make 10-
Piston speed 1 to 200 mm/s CQ2XB40-57D.
Piston rod size ø6 ø8 ø10 ø12
Rod end thread

Female thread M3 x 0.5 M4 x 0.7 M5 x 0.8 M6 x 1.0 Specifications
Male thread M5 x 0.8 M6 x 1.0 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25
+1.0 Bore size 10- (Relief type) 11- (Vacuum type)
Stroke tolerance 0 mm (mm) 32 40 50 63 32 40 50 63
Port size M5 x 0.8
Fluid Air
Vacuum port, Relief port M5 x 0.8
Bore size 11- (Vacuum type) Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
(mm) 12 16 20 25 Minimum operating pressure 0.035 MPa 0.03 MPa 0.025 MPa 0.02 MPa
Fluid Air Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa With auto switch: –10 to 60°C
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa Piston speed 1 to 200 mm/s 0.5 to 200 mm/s
Minimum operating pressure 0.03 MPa 0.025 MPa Piston rod size ø16 ø20 ø16 ø20
Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C Female thread M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.5 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.5
Ambient and fluid temperature Rod end thread
With auto switch: –10 to 60°C Male thread M14 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 M14 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5
Stroke tolerance +1.0
Piston speed 1 to 200 mm/s 0.5 to 200 mm/s 0 mm
Piston rod size ø6 ø8 ø10 ø12 Port size M5 x 0.8, 1/8 Note 1) 1/4 M5 x 0.8, 1/8 Note 1) 1/4
Female thread M3 x 0.5 M4 x 0.7 M5 x 0.8 M6 x 1.0 Vacuum port, Relief port M5 x 0.8
Rod end thread
Male thread M5 x 0.8 M6 x 1.0 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 Note 1) Only 5 stroke comes with M5 x 0.8 in the case of no auto switch on ø32.
0 mm
Port size M5 x 0.8
Vacuum port, Relief port M5 x 0.8
1162
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1163
Microspeed Cylinder
for Clean Room Series 10-, 11-CM2X
10-,11- CM2X Series

How to Order
Clean Series Mounting style
10 Relief type B Basic style
11 Vacuum type L Axial foot style
10 C(D)M2X L 40 150 M9BW G Head side flange style
BZ Boss-cut basic style
With auto switch FZ
Boss-cut rod style
(Built-in magnet) Flange style
Low speed cylinder
Bore size Number of

20 20 mm auto switches
25 25 mm
Port thread type
Nil 2 pcs.
32 32 mm Nil Rc S 1 pc.
40 40 mm TN NPT n “n” pcs.
TF G
Auto switch
Without auto switch
Nil
(Built-in magnet)
Standard Stroke ∗ For the applicable
Bore size auto switch model,
Clean series (mm) Standard stroke (mm)
refer to page 1148.
20
10- 25
(Relief type) 32 Cylinder stroke (mm)
40 Refer to “Standard Stroke” below.
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300
20
11- 25
(Vacuum type) 32
40
∗ Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
Specifications
Bore size 10- (Relief type) 11- (Vacuum type)
(mm) 20 25 32 40 20 25 32 40
Fluid Air
Minimum operating pressure 0.035 MPa 0.025 MPa
Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C
With auto switch: –10 to 60°C
Cushion
Piston speed
Rubber bumper REA
1 to 200 mm/s 0.5 to 200 mm/s
Piston rod size ø8 ø10 ø12 ø14 ø8 ø10 ø12 ø14
Rod end thread M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M14 x 1.5 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M14 x 1.5 REB
+1.4
Stroke tolerance 0 mm
Port size
Vacuum port, Refief port
1/8 1/4
M5 x 0.8
1/8 1/4
REC
CY
Precautions CX
Be sure to read before handling. MQ
Refer to front matters 42 and 43 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Refer to the Clean Series catalog separately for the precautions in clean environments. RHC
RZQ
Operating Precautions Maintenance
Warning Caution
1. Do not rotate the cover. 1. Grease pack D-
• When installing a cylinder or screwing a pipe fitting into the port, the When maintenance requires only grease, use the following part
coupling portion of the cover could break if the cover rotated. number to order.
Grease pack part no.: GR-X-005 (5 g)
-X
Caution
Individual
1. Be careful of the snap ring to pop out. -X
• When replacing the rod seal, take care that the snap ring does not
spring out while you are removing it.
1163
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1164
Related Products:
Made to Order Specifications:
-XB13: Low Speed Cylinder
5 to 50 mm/s (CY1/CY3: 7 to 50 mm/s)
Symbol
Low Speed Cylinder -X B13
CG1 CY1
Standard model no. XB13 CY3 Standard model no. XB13
MB Standard model no. XB13 MGPM

L Standard model no. XB13
Low speed cylinder
MGGM Standard model no. XB13
MGCM Standard model no. XB13
CX2 Standard model no. XB13
CXW M
CXS M
MXH
MXU Standard model no. XB13
CXT M
L
Standard model no. XB13
CXSJ ML
Note) Operate without lubrication from a pneumatic system lubricator. Low speed cylinder
Specifications
Magnetically Guide
Applicable Compact Platform
Air cylinder coupled cylinder Slide unit Dual rod cylinder Compact slide
guide cylinder
cylinder Standard rodless
cylinder cylinder Slide bearing
1 M M M M M
Series CG1 MB CY 3 MGP L MGGM MGCM CX2 CXW L CXSJL CXSL MXH MXU CXTL
Action Double acting, Single rod Double acting
CY3B: 6, 10, 12, 16, 20
20, 25, 32 32, 40 15, 20, 25, 32 20, 25, 32 20, 25 10, 16 6, 10 6, 10 12, 16
25, 32, 40 10, 15 20, 25 15, 20 15, 20 6, 10 6, 10 20, 25
Bore size (mm) 40, 50, 63 50, 63 40, 50, 63 40, 50, 63 32, 40
CY1S, 50, 63, 80 25 16, 20 16
80, 100 80, 100 80, 100 50 32 25, 32 25, 32 32, 40
CY1L: 6 to 40 100
Piston speed 5 to 50 mm/s 7 to 50 5 to 50 5 to 50 mm/s
mm/s mm/s
Air Shock
Rubber cushion Rubber bumper absorber Rubber
bumper on (Basic cylinder) (CX2: Option) bumper
both ends
Auto switch Mountable
Basic Basic
Foot Foot Basic
Mounting Basic Front mounting
Flange Flange Basic Basic
Slider Flange
Trunnion Clevis
Clevis Trunnion
Dimensions
Additional Dimensions and specifications are the same as standard products of double acting.
specifications
∗ No shock absorber is available for the Series MGGM.
1164
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1165
Related Products:
Speed Controller for Low Speed Operation
The effective area of controlled flow is approximately 1/10 of the standard type.
These controllers are suitable for controlling the speed of microspeed cylinders.
The dual type speed controller is especially suitable for cylinders with a small bore size.
Elbow/Universal Type
Air Flow/Effective Area
AS121FM-M5 AS221FM-01 AS221FM-02
Model
AS131FM-M5 AS231FM-01 AS231FM-02
Tubing Metric size ø3.2, ø4, ø6 ø3.2, ø4 ø6, ø8 ø4 ø6 ø8, ø10

O.D. ø1/8", ø5/32", ø3/16" ø3/16", ø1/4" ø1/4", ø5/16"
Inch size ø1/4" ø1/8", ø5/32" ø5/16" ø5/32" ø3/16" ø3/8"
Controlled Air flow (l/min (ANR)) 7 12 38
flow Effective area (mm2) 0.1 0.2 0.6
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) 100 180 230 260 390 460
Free flow
Effective area (mm2) 1.5 2.7 3.5 4 6 7
Note) Supply pressure: 0.5 MPa, Temperature: 20°C
In-line Type
Model AS1001FM AS2001FM AS2051FM
Tubing Metric size ø3.2, ø4, ø6 ø4 ø6 ø6 ø8
O.D. ø1/8", ø5/32", ø3/16"
Inch size ø1/4" ø5/32" ø3/16", ø1/4" ø3/16" ø1/4", ø5/16"
Controlled Air flow (l/min (ANR)) 7 12 38
flow Effective area (mm2) 0.1 0.2 0.6
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) 100 130 230 290 460
Free flow
Effective area (mm2) 1.5 2 3.5 4.5 7
Elbow Type (Metal body)

Model AS120M AS220M-01 AS220M-02
Cylinder side R 1/8 R 1/4
Port size M5 x 0.8 10-32 UNF NPT 1/8 NPT 1/4
Tube side Rc 1/8 Rc 1/4
Air flow (l/min (ANR)) 7 12 38
Controlled flow
Effective area (mm2) 0.1 0.2 0.6
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) 105 280 420
Free flow
Effective area (mm2) 1.6 4.3 6.5 REA
REB
Dual Type
REC
Model ASD230FM-M5 ASD330FM-01 ASD430FM-02 CY
Metric size ø4, ø6 ø6, ø8 ø6 ø8, ø10
Tubing O.D. ø1/8", ø5/32" ø1/4", ø5/16" CX
Inch size ø3/16", ø1/4" —
ø3/16", ø1/4" ø3/8"
Controlled flow Air flow (l/min (ANR)) 7 12 38

MQ
(Free flow) Effective area (mm2) 0.1 0.2 0.6 RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1165
P1111-P1166-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:25 PM Page 1166
Low Speed Cylinder

Specific Product Precautions
Refer to front matters 42 and 43 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator
and Auto Switch Precautions.
Recommended Pneumatic Circuit
Warning
Horizontal Operation
1 11
∗ ∗
Dual speed controller Meter-in speed controller

Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently the Meter-in speed controllers can reduce lurching while controlling
meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip. More stable low speed the speed. The two adjustment needles facilitate adjustment.
operation can be achieved than meter-in circuit alone.
Vertical Operation
∗ P2
1 W 11
∗ P1 A
a (c)
(b) P0
P0
∗
a ∗
A
W
(1) Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently (1) Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently
the meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip.∗ the meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip.∗
(2) Depending on the size of the load, installing a regulator with (2) Installing a regulator with check valve at position (c) can
check valve at position (b) can deduce lurching during reduce lurching during descent and operation delay during
descent and operation delay during ascent. ascent.
As a guide, As a guide,
when W + P0a>P0A, adjust P2 to make W + P2A = P0a.
adjust P1 to make W + P1a = P0A.
W: Load (N) P0: Operating pressure (MPa) P1, P2: Reduced pressure (MPa) a: Rod side piston area (mm2) A: Head side piston area (mm2)
Warning
Since CJ2X, CUX10 are subject to internal leakage due to their construction, the speed may not be fully controlled with the meter-out controller
(∗) during low speed operation.
Selection Pneumatic Circuit
Caution Caution
1. Operate within the standard strokes. 1. The piping length between the speed controller and
Operating with the stroke exceeding the standard stroke may the cylinder port must be kept as short as possible.
cause malfunction. If the speed controller and the cylinder port are far apart,
2. Provide a construction that does not apply a lateral speed adjustment may be unstable.
load to the cylinder. 2. Use a low speed controller to easily adjust for low
Applying a lateral load to the cylinder may cause malfunction. speed operation or a dual speed controller (Series
3. Do not use the product at a high frequency. ASD) to prevent cylinders from popping out.
Use it at 30 cpm or less as a guideline. (When the low speed controller is used, the maximum speed
4. Do not wipe out the grease in the sliding part of the may be limited.)
air cylinder.
Doing so forcefully may cause malfunction.
1166
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:21 PM Page 1069
Smooth Cylinder
Series CM2Y
ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order
CM2Y L 40 150
With auto switch CDM2Y L 40 150 M9BW
Made to Order
With auto switch For details, refer to page
(Built-in magnet)
1070.
Mounting style Number of auto switches

B Basic style Nil 2 pcs.
Bore size
L Axial foot style S 1 pc.
20 20 mm
F Rod side flange style n n pcs.
25 25 mm
C Single clevis style
40 40 mm Nil Without auto switch
∗ For the applicable auto switch
U Rod side trunnion style Cylinder stroke (mm) model, refer to the table below.
T Head side trunnion style Thread type Refer to "Standard Stroke"
E Integral clevis style Nil Rc on page 1070.
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model
BZ Boss-cut basic style TN NPT
FZ Boss-cut rod side flange style TF G switch is required, there is no need to enter
the symbol for the auto switch.
UZ Boss-cut rod side trunnion style
(Example) CDM2YB20-100
Indicator light
Load voltage Lead wire (m)

Electrical Wiring Auto switch Pre-wired Applicable
Type Special function entry (Output) 0.5 1 3 5 None connector
DC AC model load
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9N —
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9P —
REA
Solid state switch
M9B —
2-wire 12 V —
Connector H7C — —
Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V G39A — — — — — IC circuit Relay, REB
conduit Yes 2-wire
24 V
12 V
—
K39A — — — — — — PLC
Diagnostic 3-wire (NPN) M9NW —
REC
indication 3-wire (PNP) M9PW —
Grommet
(2-color) 2-wire 12 V M9BW — —
With diagnostic output (2-color) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V H7NF — IC circuit CY
3-wire
— 5V — A96 IC circuit —
Yes (Equiv. NPN)
— — — —
CX
100 V A93 — — — — —
Grommet
No 100 V or less A90 — — — — IC circuit MQ
Reed switch
Yes 100 V, 200 V B54 —

Relay,— —
No 200 V or less B64 — — PLC
— — —
Yes 12 V — C73C — —
RHC
Connector 2-wire 24 V
No 24 V or less C80C —
IC circuit
—
Terminal — A33A — — — —PLC — RZQ
conduit A34A — — — — —
Yes 100 V, 200 V — Relay,
DIN terminal A44A — — — — —
PLC
Diagnostic indication (2-color) Grommet — — B59W — — — —
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ············ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ : Manufactured upon receipt of order.
1 m ············ M (Example) M9NWM ∗ D-A9V/M9V/M9WV/M9A(V)L types cannot be mounted.
D-
3 m ············ L (Example) M9NWL ∗ Do not add the suffix (N) indicating “no lead wire” to the part numbers of models D-A3A,
5 m ············ Z (Example) M9NWZ A44A, G39A and K39A. -X
None ········· N (Example) H7CN
∗ In addition to the models in the above table, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For more information, refer to page 1082. Individual
∗ Refer to pages 1784 and 1785 for details of auto switches with a pre-wired connector. -X
∗ D-A9/M9/M9W auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (Only auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipped.)
∗ D-C7/C80/H7 auto switches are assembled at the time of shipment.
1069
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:21 PM Page 1070
Series CM2Y
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40

Fluid Air
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch –10 to 70°C (with no freezing)
temperature With auto switch –10 to 60°C (with no freezing)
Lubrication Non-lube
Integral clevis Stroke length tolerance
+1.4
0 mm
JIS Symbol
Double acting: Single rod Cushion Rubber bumper
Allowable leakage rate 0.5 l/min (ANR) or less
Minimum Operating Pressure

Unit: MPa
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Made to Order Minimum operating pressure 0.02
(For details, refer to pages 1836, 1851 to 1954.)
Symbol Specifications Mounting Bracket Part No.
—XA Change of rod end shape
—XC3 Special port location Minimum Bore size (mm) Description (when ordering
Mounting bracket a minimum number)
—XC6 Made of stainless steel order 20 25 32 40
—XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/adjustable retraction type Axial foot∗ 2 CM-L020B CM-L032B CM-L040B Foot 2 pcs., Mounting nut 1 pc.
—XC13 Auto switch rail mounting style Flange 1 CM-F020B CM-F032B CM-F040B Flange 1 pc., Mounting nut 1 pc.
—XC20 Head cover axial port Single clevis∗∗ 1 CM-C020B CM-C032B CM-C040B Single clevis 1 pc., Liner 3 pcs.
Double clevis 1 pc., Liner 3 pcs.,
Double clevis (with pin) ∗∗, ∗∗∗ 1 CM-D020B CM-D032B CM-D040B
Clevis pin 1 pc., Retaining ring 2 pcs.
Precautions Trunnion (with nut) 1 CM-T020B CM-T032B CM-T040B
Trunnion 1 pc.,
Trunnion nut 1 pc.
Be sure to read before handling. ∗ When ordering foot brackets, order 2 pieces per cylinder unit.
Refer to front matters 42 and 43 for ∗∗ Three liners are included in the clevis bracket for adjusting an angle when mounting it.
∗∗∗ Clevis pins and retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are included.
11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Mounting Bracket and Accessory
Precautions. Standard Option
Accessory Note 3) Note 4)
Mounting Rod end Clevis Single Double Clevis
Mounting knuckle knuckle
Handling Precautions nut nut pin joint joint bracket
Basic style (1 pc.) — —
Warning
Axial foot style (2) — —
1. Do not rotate the cover
• When installing a cylinder or screwing a fitting into Rod side flange style (1) — —
the port, the coupling portion of the cover may be Head side flange style (1) — —
damaged if the cover rotates. — Note 1) —
Integral clevis style
Caution Single clevis style — Note 1) — —
1. Be careful of the retaining ring to pop out. Double clevis style Note 3) — Note 1) Note 5) —
• When replacing the rod seal, be careful of the
Rod side trunnion style (1)Note 2) — —
retaining ring not to pop out while removing it.
Head side trunnion style (1)Note 2) — —
Boss-cut basic style (1) — —
Replacement Part: Rod Seal Boss-cut flange style (1) — —
Boss-cut trunnion style (1) — —
Bore size
Part no. Note 1) Mounting nuts are not attached to the integral clevis, single clevis and double clevis types.
(mm) Note 2) Trunnion nuts are mounted on the rod side trunnion style and head side trunnion style.
20 PDU-8Z Note 3) Pins and retaining rings (cotter pins in case of ø40) are packed with the double clevis
25 PDU-10Z and double knuckle joint styles.
Note 4) Pins and retaining rings are packed with clevis brackets.
32 PDU-12LZ
Note 5) Retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are included in clevis pins.
40 PDU-14LZ
Standard Stroke
Grease Pack for Maintenance
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm)
When only grease for maintenance is necessary,
20, 25, 32, 40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300
please order by the following part numbers.
Grease pack part no.: GR-L-005 (5 g) Note 1) Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
GR-L-010 (10 g) Note 2) As the stroke increases, more sliding resistance may result due to the
deflection of the piston rod and other factors. Take measures such as the
GR-L-150 (150 g)
installation of a guide.
1070
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:21 PM Page 1071
Smooth Cylinder Series CM2Y
Mass (kg)
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 Calculation: (Example) CM2YL32-100
• Basic mass·················0.44 (Foot style, ø32)
Basic style 0.14 0.21 0.28 0.56 • Additional mass··········0.08/50 stroke
Axial foot style 0.29 0.37 0.44 0.83 • Cylinder stroke···········100 stroke
0.44 + 0.08 x 100/50 = 0.60 kg
Flange style 0.20 0.30 0.37 0.68
Clevis integrated style 0.12 0.19 0.27 0.52
Basic
mass Single clevis style 0.18 0.25 0.32 0.65
Double clevis style 0.19 0.27 0.33 0.69
Trunnion style 0.18 0.28 0.34 0.66
Boss-cut basic style 0.13 0.19 0.26 0.53
Boss-cut flange style 0.19 0.28 0.35 0.65
Boss-cut trunnion style 0.17 0.26 0.32 0.63
Option
bracket
Low Friction Cylinder Mounting
CM2Y Mounting style Bore size Stroke X1854
Same mounting specification as CM2Q
In order to adjust the mounting dimensions of the low friction cylinder (CM2Q), extend the longitudinal dimension (S, ZZ) by 3 mm.
Specifications
Cylinder bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40
Direction of low friction Dual directions
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.05 MPa REA
∗ Low friction operates in dual directions. REB
REC
Dimensions
CY
CX
MQ
S + Stroke
RHC
ZZ + Stroke
RZQ
Bore size (mm) S ZZ
20 65 119
25 65 123
D-
32 67 125
-X
40 91 157
Individual
∗ Add 3 mm to S and ZZ dimensions of the double acting, single rod type on pages 1072 to 1076 for the dimensions for each mounting bracket other than the basic style.
-X
1071
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:21 PM Page 1072
Series CM2Y
Basic Style (B)

CM2YB Bore size Stroke
G
øI
2 x øEh8
NA
øD

AL 1.5 1.5
2 x FL
NA
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
0
20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20–0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 116
0
25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26–0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 120
0
32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26–0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 122
0
40 24 21 22 41 14 32 0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 154
Boss-cut (mm)
Bore size (mm) ZZ
20 103
25 107
32 109
40 138

CM2YL Bore size Stroke
H
A K F G 2xP
øD
øI
2 x øLC
LH
4 x øLD
MM Width across flats NA N
N
Width across flats B2 Y X S + Stroke X Y
LT
LX
Z LS + Stroke LZ
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
20 18 15.5 40 13 26 8 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 4 6.8 25 102 3.2 40 55 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 20 8 21 131
25 22 19.5 47 17 32 10 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 4 6.8 28 102 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 20 8 25 135
32 22 19.5 47 17 32 12 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 4 6.8 28 104 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 20 8 25 137
40 24 21 54 22 41 14 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 4 7 30 134 3.2 55 75 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 23 10 27 171
1072
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:21 PM Page 1073

CM2YF Bore size Stroke
H2 G 2xP G
(Rc, NPT, G)
C2
øEh8
FY
øD
øI
B
2 x øFD FX MM Effective thread length
Mounting hole AL Width across flats NA 1.5
ø40 FZ Width across 2 x FL
A K FT N
flats KA Z N
ø20 to ø32
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut style
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 C2 D E F FL FD FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I K KA MM N NA NN P S Z ZZ
0
20 18 15.5 34 13 26 30 20 –0.033 13 10.5
8 7 4 60 — 75 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 37 116
0
25 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 41 120
0
32 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 41 122
0
40 24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 7 5 66 36 82 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 45 154
Boss-cut Style (mm)

Bore size (mm) ZZ
20 103
25 107
32 109
40 138
REA
REB
REC
CY
CX
MQ
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1073
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:21 PM Page 1074
Series CM2Y

CM2YG Bore size Stroke

H2 Width across flats B2 2 x øFD 4 x øFD
Width across flats B1 H1 2 x NN G 2xP G
Mounting hole
C2
(Rc, NPT, G) Mounting hole
øEh8
øD
FY
øI
B
MM AL 1.5 Width across flats NA N FX
Width across flats KA A K F N FZ ø40
H S + Stroke FT
ø20 to ø32
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 C2 D E F FL FD FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I
0
20 18 15.5 34 13 26 30 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 41 5 8 28
0
25 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 33.5
0
32 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 37.5
0
40 24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 7 5 66 36 82 11 50 8 10 46.5
(mm)
Bore size (mm) K KA MM N NA NN P S Z ZZ
20 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 107 116
25 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 111 120
32 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 113 122
40 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 143 154

CM2YC Bore size Stroke
+0.058
Effective thread length FL øCDH10 0
Width across flats B1 H1 NN G

G 2xP
øI
(Rc, NPT, G)
øCI
NA
øEh8
øD
MM AL 1.5 CX –0.1
–0.2
Width across flats KA A K F N N U NA
H S + Stroke L
Z + Stroke RR
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CI CD CX D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN P RR S U Z ZZ
0
20 18 15.5 13 24 9 10 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 9 62 14 133 142
0
25 22 19.5 17 30 9 10 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 9 62 14 137 146
0
32 22 19.5 17 30 9 10 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 9 64 14 139 148
0
40 24 21 22 38 10 15 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 11 88 18 177 188
1074
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:21 PM Page 1075

CM2YD Bore size Stroke
+0.058
G Axis d9
–0.040 CL
Width across flats B1 H1 NN G 2xP –0.076
(Rc, NPT, G)
øI
øEh8
NA
øCI
øD
MM AL 1.5 N U CX +0.2
+0.1
H S + Stroke L NA
Z + Stroke RR
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CD CI CL CX CZ D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN P RR S U Z ZZ
0
20 18 15.5 13 9 24 25 10 19 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 9 62 14 133 142
0
25 22 19.5 17 9 30 25 10 19 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 9 62 14 137 146
0
32 22 19.5 17 9 30 25 10 19 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 9 64 14 139 148
0
40 24 21 22 10 38 41.2 15 30 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 11 88 18 177 188
∗ Clevis pin and snap ring (cotter pin for bore size ø40) are shipped together.

CM2YU Bore size Stroke
–0.025
øTDe9 –0.061
G 2xP G 2 x NN
øEh8
øD
øTY
øI
TX AL Width across flats NA
Width across flats KA TT 1.5 2 x FL
TZ A K
Z N N
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut style REA

REB
REC
ZZ + Stroke
CY
(mm) CX
20 18 15.5 13 26 8 0
20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 MQ
0
25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
0
32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 –0.033
0
13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 RHC
40 24 21 22 41 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
(mm) Boss-cut Style (mm) RZQ

Bore size (mm) S TD TT TX TY TZ Z ZZ Bore size (mm) ZZ
20 62 8 10 32 32 52 36 116 20 103
25 62 9 10 40 40 60 40 120 25 107
32 64 9 10 40 40 60 40 122 32 109
40 88 10 11 53 53 77 44.5 154 40 138
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1075
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:21 PM Page 1076
Series CM2Y

CM2YT Bore size Stroke
–0.025
øTDe9 –0.061
G Width across flats B2
2 x NN G 2xP
øTY
øEh8
øD
øI
MM AL 1.5 Width across flats NA TX
TZ
H S + Stroke TT
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
0
20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
0
25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
0
32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
0
40 24 21 22 41 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
(mm)
20 62 8 10 32 32 52 108 118
25 62 9 10 40 40 60 112 122
32 64 9 10 40 40 60 114 124
40 88 10 11 53 53 77 143.5 154

CM2YE Bore size Stroke
LZ + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Z + Stroke LP
H S + Stroke L RR NA
A K F N N U +0.058 0
AL G 2xP G øCDH10 0 CX –0.1
H1 1.5 (Rc, NPT, G)
øI
øEh8
NA
øCI
øD
LH
MM 2 x øLD
LF LG
LT
LY LV
of clevis pivot bracket.
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CD CI CX D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN
0
20 18 15.5 13 8 20 12 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 12 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
0
25 22 19.5 17 8 22 12 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 12 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
0
32 22 19.5 17 10 27 20 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 15 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
0
40 24 21 22 10 33 20 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 15 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
(mm)
Bore size (mm) P RR S U Z ZZ
20 9 62 11.5 115 124
25 9 62 11.5 119 128
32 12 64 14.5 124 136
40 12 88 14.5 153 165
1076
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:21 PM Page 1077
Series CM2Y
I-020B, 032B Material: Rolled steel I-040B Material: Free cutting sulfur steel
Y (Max.)
øNDH10 MM R R1 øNDH10
MM 45° 1
RR
MM
ø E1
øNDH10
NX1 A
NX
øE1
U1 H A1 U1
R2 Z (Min.) A1 U1 L1
L1 A NX
A
Applicable bore
Bore size A H MM NDH10 NX1 U1 R2 Y Z Part no. size (mm) A A1 E1 L1 MM NDH10 NX R1 U1
+0.058 –0.1 +0.058 –0.1
20 18 41 M8 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 14 10 11 66 I-020B 20 46 16 20 36 M8 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 10 14
+0.058 –0.1 +0.058 –0.1
25, 32 22 45 M10 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 14 10 14 69 I-032B 25, 32 48 18 20 38 M10 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 10 14
+0.070
40 24 50 M14 x 1.5 12 0 16 –0.1
–0.3 20 14 13 92 I-040B 40 69 22 24 55 M14 x 1.5 12 +0.070
0 16 –0.1
–0.3 15.5 20
Y (Max.)
øND hole H10 MM
Axis d9
NX2
L A
U2 H
R2 Z (Min.)

+0.2
20 18 41 25 M8 x 1.25 9 9 +0.1 10 14 11 66
+0.2
25, 32 22 45 25 M10 x 1.25 9 9 +0.1 10 14 14 69
+0.3
40 24 50 49.7 M14 x 1.5 12 16 +0.1 13 25 13 92
Y-020B, Y-032B Material: Rolled steel Y-040B Material: Cast iron

1 1
RR RR
øND hole H10

REA
Axis d9 REB
øE1
øE1
NX
NZ
NZ
NX
L
L
REC
A1 U1
L1 A1 U1
A L1
A
CY
Applicable bore Applicable pin Retaining ring
Part no. A A1 E1 L L1 MM ND NX NZ R1 U1 size
Y-020B
size
20 46 16 20 25 36 M8 x 1.25 9 9 +0.2
18 5 14
part number
CDP-1
Cotter pin
Type C 9 for axis
CX
+0.1
+0.2
Y-032B 25, 32 48 18 20 25 38 M10 x 1.25 9 9 18 5 14 CDP-1 Type C 9 for axis
Y-040B 40 68 22 24 49.7 55 M14 x 1.5 12
+0.1
16 +0.3 38 13 25 CDP-3 ø3 x 18l

MQ
+0.1
∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for ø40) are attached.
RHC
Bore size: ø20, ø25, ø32 Bore size: ø40 Bore size: ø40
RZQ
Bore size: ø20, ø25, ø32
2 x ø3 2 x ø3 D-
ø
-X
ø
ø
ø
Individual
-X
ø3 x 18l ø3 x 18l
∗ Retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are included. ∗ Retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are included.
1077
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:21 PM Page 1078
Series CM2Y
Rod End Nut (mm) Clevis Pivot Bracket (For CM2E) (mm)
d
L
LV
øD
C
RLR øLC hole +0.05
+0.15 LX
H B Axis –0.040
–0.076
Applicable bore
LH
NT-02 20
LT
13 15.0 12.5 M8 x 1.25 5
NT-03 25, 32 17 19.6 16.5 M10 x 1.25 6
NT-04 40 22 25.4 21.0 M14 x 1.5 8 LF LG
LE 2 x øLD
LY
Mounting Nut (mm) Part no. Applicable bore L LC LD LE LF LG LH LR LT LX LY LV Applicable pin

size (mm) part no.
CM-E020B 20, 25 24.5 8 6.8 22 15 30 30 10 3.2 12 59 18.4 CD-S02
d CM-E032B 32, 40 34 10 9 25 15 40 40 13 4 20 75 28 CD-S03
Note 1) Clevis bracket pins and retaining rings are included.
øD
H B
Clevis Pin (For CM2E) (mm)
Applicable bore
Part no. size (mm) B C D d H Material: Carbon steel
SN-020B 20 26 30 25.5 M20 x 1.5 8
øDd9
ød
SN-032B 25, 32 32 37 31.5 M26 x 1.5 8
SN-040B 40 41 47.3 40.5 M32 x 2.0 10 m l m
t L t
Trunnion Nut (mm) Applicable bore Applicable retaining

Part no. Dd9 d L l m t
H size (mm) ring part no.
CD-S02 20, 25 8 –0.040
–0.076 7.6 24.5 19.5 1.6 0.9 Type C 8 for axis
B
CD-S03 32, 40 10 –0.040
–0.076 9.6 34 29 1.35 1.15 Type C 10 for axis
Note) Retaining rings are included.
øC
øD
d
Applicable bore
TN-020B 20 26 28 25.5 M20 x 1.5 10
TN-032B 25, 32 32 34 31.5 M26 x 1.5 10
TN-040B 40 41 45 40.5 M32 x 2 10
1078
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:21 PM Page 1079
D-A9 D-M9
D-M9W
≅ Hs ≅Hs
16.5
16.5
A 22 B A 22 B
(24.5)
( ): For D-A93 type
D-C7/C8 D-H7/H7W/H7NF
≅Hs ≅Hs
Auto switch
Auto switch
≅Hs ≅Hs
Auto switch
Auto switch
≅Hs G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D. ≅Hs G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D.
ø6.8 to ø9.6) ø6.8 to ø9.6)
REA
D-A44A D-H7C
REB
≅Hs Auto switch Auto switch
≅Hs
REC
CY
G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D.
ø6.8 to ø11.5) CX
MQ
D-C73C/C80C
Auto switch
RHC
≅Hs
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1079
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:21 PM Page 1080
Series CM2Y
Auto switch
model
D-C7 D-A3A D-H7
D-M9 D-B5 D-C80 D-G39A D-H7C
D-A9 D-B59W D-G5NTL
D-M9W D-B64 D-C73C D-K39A D-H7W
D-C80C D-A44A D-H7NF
Bore size
20 6.5 5.5 10.5 9.5 1 0 7 6 4 3 0.5 0 6 5 2.5 1.5
25 6.5 5.5 10.5 9.5 1 0 7 6 4 3 0.5 0 6 5 2.5 1.5
32 7.5 6.5 11.5 10.5 2 1 8 7 5 4 1.5 0.5 7 6 3.5 2.5
40 13.5 11.5 17.5 15.5 7 6 13 12 10 9 6.5 5.5 12 11 8.5 7.5

Auto switch
model D-B5 D-C7
D-A9 D-B64 D-C80 D-A3A
D-C73C
D-M9 D-B59W D-H7 D-G39A D-A44A
D-C80C
D-M9W D-G5NTL D-H7W D-K39A
D-H7C D-H7NF
Bore size
20 22 25.5 22.5 25 60 69.5
25 24.5 28 25 27.5 62.5 72
32 28 31.5 28.5 31 66 75.5
40 32 35.5 32.5 35 70 79.5
1080
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:21 PM Page 1081

Auto switch model 2 pcs. n pcs.
1 pc.
D-A9 15 + 45
(n-2)
D-M9 10 15 Note) 45 Note) 2 45 + 45 (n-2)
D-M9W (n = 2, 4, 6···)
(n-2)
D-C7 15 + 45
10 15 50 2 50 + 45 (n-2)
D-C80 (n = 2, 4, 6···)
D-H7 15 + 45
(n-2)
D-H7W 10 15 60 2 60 + 45 (n-2)
D-H7NF (n = 2, 4, 6···)
D-C73C 15 + 50
(n-2)
D-C80C 10 15 65 2 65 + 50 (n-2)
D-H7C (n = 2, 4, 6···)
(n-2)
D-B5/B64 15 + 50
10 15 75 2 75 + 55 (n-2)
D-G5NTL (n = 2, 4, 6···)
(n-2)
20 + 50
D-B59W 15 20 75 2 75 + 55(n-2)
(n = 2, 4, 6···)
D-A3A/G39A 10 35 100 35 + 30(n-2) 100 + 100 (n-2)

D-K39A/A44A
Note) When 2 D-A93/M9/M9W auto switches are included.

Different surfaces Same surface
A
A–6 6 15
Auto switch model
Auto switch
D-M9 6 B–6
D-M9W B REA
The proper auto switch mounting position is 6 mm inward from the
switch holder edge.
(cylinder tube circumferential exterior) so that the auto switch and REB
lead wire do not interfere with each other.
D-A93 — Less than 50 strokes REC
D-M9
Less than 20 strokes Less than 55 strokes
D-M9W CY
Operating Range
CX
(mm) MQ
Bore size (mm)
Auto switch model
20 25 32 40 RHC
D-A9 6 6 6 6
D-M9
3.5 3 3.5 3
RZQ
D-M9W
D-C7/C80
7 8 8 8
D-C73C/C80C
D-B5/B64 D-
8 8 9 9
D-A3A/A44A
D-B59W 12 12 13 13 ∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, -X
D-H7/H7W not meant to be guaranteed. (Assuming
4 4 4.5 5 approximately ±30% dispersion)
Individual
D-G5NTL/H7NF -X
There may be the case it will vary
D-H7C 7 8.5 9 10 substantially depending on an ambient
D-G39A/K39A 8 9 9 9 environment.
1081
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:21 PM Page 1082
Series CM2Y
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Part No.
Bore size (mm)

Auto switch model
20 25 32 40
D-A9 Note) Note) Note) Note)

D-M9 qBM2-020 qBM2-025 qBM2-032 qBM2-040
D-M9W wBJ3-1 wBJ3-1 wBJ3-1 wBJ3-1
D-C7/C80
D-C73C/C80C
D-H7 BM2-020 BM2-025 BM2-032 BM2-040
D-H7W
D-H7NF
D-B5/B64
D-B59W BA2-020 BA2-025 BA2-032 BA2-040
D-G5NTL
D-A3A/A44A BM3-020 BM3-025 BM3-032 BM3-040

D-G39A/K39A
Note) Two kinds of auto switch mounting brackets are used as a set.
e
Switch spacer
(Stainless steel)
d
Switch holder
(Resin)
Auto switch
c
Set screw (not used)
Switch bracket
(Stainless steel)
b
Auto switch mounting screw
q BM2-: A set of a and b in the figure.

w BJ3-1: A set of c, d and e in the figure.
a
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted.
For detailed specifications, refer to pages 1719 to 1827.
Auto switch type Model Electrical entry (Direction) Features
D-B53, C73, C76 —
Reed
Solid state D-H7NW, H7PW, H7BW Diagnostic indication (2-color indication)
D-G5NTL With timer
∗ With pre-wired connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1784 and 1785.
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state auto switches (D-F9G, F9H type) are also available. For details, refer to page 1746.
1082
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:22 PM Page 1109
Smooth Cylinder
Recommended Pneumatic Circuit

Refer to the diagrams below when controlling speed with the smooth cylinder.
Warning
Horizontal operation (Speed control)
1 11
∗ ∗
Dual speed controller Meter-in speed controller

Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently the Meter-in speed controllers can reduce lurching while controlling
meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip. More stable low speed the speed. The two adjustment needles facilitate adjustment.
operation can be achieved than meter-in circuit alone.
Vertical operation (Speed control)
1 11 ∗ P2
W
A
∗ P1 a (c)
(b)
P0 REA
P0 REB
∗
REC
a ∗
A CY
W
CX
MQ
(1) Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently (1) Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently
the meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip.∗ the meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip.∗ RHC
(2) Depending on the size of the load, installing a regulator with (2) Installing a regulator with check valve at position (c) can
check valve at position (b) can reduce lurching during descent reduce lurching during descent and operation delay during RZQ
and operation delay during ascent. ascent.
As a guide, As a guide,
when W + P0a>P0A, adjust P2 to make W + P2A = P0a.
adjust P1 to make W + P1a = P0A.
D-
-X
W: Load (N) P0: Operating pressure (MPa) P1, P2: Reduced pressure (MPa) a: Rod side piston area (mm2) A: Head side piston area (mm2)
Individual
-X
1109
P1023-P1110-E.qxd 08.11.17 3:22 PM Page 1110
Smooth Cylinder
Lubricant Air Source
Caution Caution
1. Operate without lubrication. 1. Take measure to prevent pressure fluctuations.
Lubrication may cause malfunction. Pressure fluctuations may cause malfunction.
2. Do not use grease not specified by SMC.
Using grease other than that specified may cause malfunction.
Order using the following part numbers when only
maintenance grease is needed.
Grease
Volume Part no.
5g GR-L-005
10 g GR-L-010
150 g GR-L-150
3. Do not wipe off grease from the sliding part of the

air cylinder.
Wiping grease from the sliding part of the air cylinder forcefully
may cause malfunction.
1110
Series
10-
11- CM2X Low speed cylinder
Double acting single rod / ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order
Mounting style
B Basic style
L Axial foot style
Port thread type G Head side flange style
Clean series Nil Rc BZ Boss-cut basic style
10 Relief type TN NPT Boss-cut rod side
11 Vacuum suction type FZ
TF G flange style
10 C D M2X L 40 150 H7B

Built-in magnet
Nil No
With auto switch
D
(Built-in magnet)
Number of
auto switches
Nil 2 pcs.
Low speed cylinder S 1 pc.
n n pcs.
Bore size
20 20mm
25 25mm Type of auto switch
32 32mm Reed switch C73
40 40mm Solid state switch H7B, H7A1

Refer to the standard stroke table below.
Model
Bore size Standard stroke Auto switch Cushion
Model Port size Lubrication Action
(mm) (mm) mounting Rubber Air
10-CM2X첸20 20
Relief type
10-CM2X첸25 25 1/8
10-CM2X첸32 32
10-CM2X첸40 40 1/4 Double acting 25, 50, 75, 100, 125
Non-lube 앪 앪 —
150, 200, 250, 300
suction type
11-CM2X첸20 20 single rod

Vacuum
11-CM2X첸25 25 1/8
11-CM2X첸32 32
11-CM2X첸40 40 1/4
174
Low speed cylinder 10- CM2X/11-CM2X
Specifications
Bore size 10- (Relief type) 11- (Vacuum suction type)
(mm) 20 25 32 40 20 25 32 40
Air cylinder
Fluid Air
Without auto switch : –10°C to 70°C (With no freezing)
With auto switch : –10 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Rotary actuator
Piston speed 1 to 200 mm/s 0.5 to 200 mm/s
Piston rod diameter ø8 ø10 ø12 ø14 ø8 ø10 ø12 ø14
Rod end thread M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M14 x 1.5 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M14 x 1.5
Rod end thread tolerance JIS Class 2
0 mm
Port size 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4
Vacuum suction port, Relief port M5 x 0.8
Air gripper
Grease Fluorine grease
Particle generation grade Grade 2 Grade 1
Suction flow rate (Reference values) — 2 l/min (ANR)
External dimensions and applicable auto switches are the same as 10-/11-CM2. Please refer to pages 15 to 20.
Directional control
valve
Flow control
equipment
Specific Product Precautions
control equipment
Filter, Pressure
Precautions Maintenance
Warning Caution
1. Do not rotate the cover. 1. Grease pack
Fittings & Tubing

When installing a cylinder or screwing a pipe fitting into the port, Use the following part number to order grease for maintenance.
the coupling portion of the cover could break if the cover is Grease pack
rotated. GR-X-005 (5g)
Caution
Air preparation
1. Be careful of the snap ring to pop out.

equipment
When replacing the rod seal, take care that the snap ring does
not spring out while you are removing it.
Pressure switch
Clean gas filter
175
Actuator / Common Precautions 1
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to the main text for precautions for each series.
Precaution on designing Selection
Warning Warning
1. There is a possibility of dangerous sudden action by air 1. Confirm the specifications.
cylinders if sliding parts of machinery are twisted due to The products featured in this catalog are designed for use in
external forces, etc. industrial compressed air systems. If the products are used in
In such cases, personal injury by catching hands or feet in the conditions where pressure and/or temperature are outside the
machinery, or damage to the machinery itself may occur. range of specifications, damage and/or malfunctions may occur.
Therefore, the machine should be adjusted to operate smoothly Do not use in these conditions. (Refer to the specifications).
and designed to avoid such dangers. Please consult with SMC if you use a fluid other than compressed
air.
2. A protective cover is recommended to minimize the risk of
personal injury. 2. Intermediate Stops
If a driven object and moving parts of a cylinder are in close With a 3-position closed center type valve, it is difficult to
proximity, personal injury may occur. Design the structure to accurately and precisely stop a piston at the required position in
avoid contact with the human body. the same way as can be done with hydraulic pressure due to the
compressibility of air.
3. Securely tighten all stationary parts and connected parts so
Furthermore, since valves and cylinders, etc. are not guaranteed
that they will not become loose.
for zero air leakage, it may not be possible to hold a stopped
Particularly when a cylinder operates at a high frequency or is
position for an extended period of time. Please contact with SMC
installed in a place where there is a lot of vibration, ensure that all
when it is necessary to hold a stopped position for an extended
parts remain secure.
period of time.
4. A deceleration circuit may be required.
When a driven object is operated at high speed or the load is
heavy, a cylinder's cushion will not be sufficient to absorb the
impact. Install a deceleration circuit to reduce the speed before Caution
cushioning to relieve the impact. 1. Operate within the limits of the maximum feasible stroke.
In this case, the rigidity of the machinery should also be Operation that exceeds the maximum stroke may damage a
examined. piston rod. Refer to the air cylinder model selection procedures
5. Consider a possible drop in circuit pressure due to a power for the maximum feasible strokes.
outage, etc. 2. Operate a cylinder within a range such that collision damage
When a cylinder is used in a clamping mechanism, there is a will not occur to a piston at the stroke end.
danger of workpiece dropping if there is a decrease in clamping Operate a cylinder within a range so that a piston having inertial
force due to a drop in circuit pressure caused by a power outage, force will not be damaged when it collides against the cover at the
etc. Therefore, safety equipment should be installed to prevent stroke end. Refer to the air cylinder model selection procedures
damage to machinery and personal injury. Suspension for the maximum feasible strokes.
mechanisms and lifting devices also require consideration for
drop prevention. 3. Use a speed controller to adjust the cylinder speed,
gradually increasing from a low speed to the desired speed
6. Consider a possible loss of power source. setting.
Measures should be taken to avoid personal injury and
equipment damage in the event that there is a loss of power to 4. Provide intermediate supports for long stroke cylinders.
equipment controlled by pneumatics, electricity, or hydraulics. An intermediate support should be provided in order to prevent
damage to a long stroke cylinder, due to problems such as
7. Design circuitry to prevent the sudden lurching of driven sagging of the rod, deflection of the cylinder tube, vibration and
objects. external load.
When a cylinder is driven by an exhaust center type directional
control valve or when it is started up after residual pressure is
exhausted from the circuit, etc., the piston and its driven object
will lurch when the cylinder is operated at high speed if pressure
is applied to one side of the cylinder, due to the absence of air
pressure inside the cylinder. Therefore, equipment should be
selected and circuits should be designed to prevent this sudden
lurching, because there is a danger of personal injury and/or
damage to equipment when this occurs.
8. Consider emergency stops.
Design the machinery so that personal injury and/or damage to
machinery and equipment will not occur when the machinery is
stopped by a safety device under abnormal conditions, such as a
power outage or a manual emergency stop.
9. Consider the action when operation is restarted after an
emergency stop or abnormal stop.
Design the machinery so that personal injury or equipment
damage will not occur upon restart of operation.
When the cylinder has to be reset at the start position, install
safety manual control equipment.
176
Air cylinder
Mounting Air Supply
Caution Warning
Rotary actuator
1. Be certain to match the rod shaft center with the load and 1. Use clean air.
direction of movement when connecting. Do not use compressed air which contains chemicals, synthetic
When not properly matched, problems may arise with the rod and oil containing organic solvents, salts or corrosive gases, etc. as
tube, and damage may be caused due to friction on areas such this may cause damage or malfunction.
as the inner tube surface, bushings, rod surface, and seals.
2. When using an external guide, connect the rod end and the
load in such a way that there is no interference at any point
within the stroke. Caution
Air gripper
3. Do not scratch or gouge the sliding portion of the cylinder 1. Install air filters.
tube or the piston rod by striking it with an object, or Install air filters close to valves at their upstream side. A filtration
squeezing it. degree of 5µm or less should be selected.
The tube bore is manufactured under precise tolerances. Thus, 2. Install an aftercooler, air dryer, or water separator (Drain
even a slight deformation could lead to a malfunction. Catch).
Directional control
Moreover, scratches or gouges, etc. in the piston rod may lead to Compressed air that includes excessive drainage may cause
damaged seals and cause air leakage. malfunction of valves and other pneumatic equipment. To prevent
valve
this, install an air dryer, aftercooler or water separator (drain
4. Do not use until you verify that the equipment can operate catch), etc.
properly.
After mounting, repairs, or modification, etc., connect the air 3. Use the product within the specified range of fluid and
supply and electric power, and then confirm proper mounting by ambient temperature.
means of appropriate function and leak tests. Take measures to prevent freezing at temperature below 5°C,
since moisture in circuits may freeze and cause damage to seals
Flow control
equipment
5. Instruction manual and lead to malfunctions.
Install the products and operate them only after reading the
instruction manual carefully and understanding its contents.
Also keep the manual where it can be referred to as necessary.
control equipment
Filter, Pressure
Cushion
Caution
1. Readjust with a cushion needle.
Cushions are adjusted at the time of shipment; however, the
cushion needle on the cover should be readjusted, when the
Fittings & Tubing

product is put into service based on factors such as the size of
the load and the operating speed. When the cushion needle is
turned clockwise, the restriction becomes smaller and the
cushion's effectiveness is increased. Tighten the lock nut securely
after adjustment is performed.
2. Do not operate the actuator with the cushion needle fully
closed.
Air preparation
equipment
This could damage the seals.

Pressure switch
Clean gas filter
177
Operating Environment Maintenance
Warning Warning
1. Do not use in atmospheres or locations where corrosion 1. Perform maintenance procedures as shown in the
hazards exist. instruction manual.
Refer to the construction drawings regarding cylinder materials. Improper handling may result in malfunction and damage of
machinery or equipment.
2. In locations where ultrapure water or cleaning solvent, etc.
splashes on the equipment, take suitable measures to 2. Removal of equipment, and supply / exhaust of compressed
protect the rod. air
Before any machinery or equipment is removed, first ensure that
the appropriate measures are in place to prevent the fall or erratic
movement of driven objects and equipment, then cut off the
electric power and release the compressed air in the system.
When machinery is restarted, proceed with caution after
confirming that appropriate measures are in place to prevent
cylinders from sudden movement.
Caution
1. Drain flushing
Remove drainage from air filters regularly.
178
Auto switch / Common Precautions 1
Air cylinder
Design/Selection
Warning
· Similarly, when operating below a specified voltage, it is possible that
Rotary actuator
1. Confirm the specifications.
Read the specifications carefully and use this product the load may be ineffective even though the auto switch function
appropriately. The product may be damaged or malfunction if it is is normal. Therefore, the formula below should be satisfied after
used outside the specifications of current voltage, temperature or confirming the minimum operating voltage of the load.
impact.
2. Use caution when multiple cylinders are used in close Power voltage – Internal voltage drop of switch > Minimum
proximity to each other. operating voltage of load
When two or more auto switch cylinders are lined up in close
Air gripper
proximity to each other, magnetic field interference may cause 2) If the internal resistance of a light emitting diode causes a
the switches to malfunction. Maintain a minimum cylinder problem, select a switch without an indicator light (D-A6첸,
separation of 40mm. (When the allowable interval is specified for A80, A80H, A90, A90V, C80, R80, 90, E80A, Z80).
each cylinder series, use the indicated value.) <Solid state switch>
3) Generally, the internal voltage drop will be greater with a 2-
3. Use caution to the ON time of a switch at the intermediate
wire solid state auto switch than with a reed switch. Take the
Directional control
position of stroke.
same precautions as in 1).
When an auto switch is placed at an intermediate position of the
Also please note that a 12VDC relay is not applicable.
valve
stroke and a load is driven at the time the piston passes, the auto
switch will operate, but if the speed is too fast, the operating time 6. Use caution to the leakage current.
will be shortened and the load may not operate properly. The <Solid state switch>
maximum detectable piston speed is : With a 2-wire solid state auto switch, current (leakage current)
Auto switch operation range (mm) flows to the load to operate the internal circuit even when in the
V (mm/s) = x 1000 OFF state.
Load operating time (ms)
Flow control
equipment
Current to operate load (OFF condition) > Leakage current
In cases of high piston speed, the use of an auto switch (D-F5NT, If the condition given in the above formula is not met, it will not
F7NT, G5NT and M5첸T) with a built-in OFF delay timer (approx. reset correctly (stays ON). Use a 3-wire switch if this specification
200ms) makes it possible to extend the load operating time. cannot be satisfied.
4. Wiring should be kept as short as possible. Moreover, leakage current flow to the load will be "n" times larger
<Reed switch> when "n" auto switches are connected in parallel.
control equipment
Filter, Pressure
As the length of the wiring to a load gets longer, the rush current 7. Do not use a load that generates surge voltage.
at switching ON becomes greater, and this may shorten the <Reed switch>
product's life. (The switch will stay ON all the time). When driving a load such as a relay that generates a surge
1) For an auto switch without a contact protection circuit, use a voltage, use a switch with a built-in contact protection circuit or a
contact protection box when the wire length is 5m or longer. contact protection box.
2) Even if an auto switch has a built-in contact protection circuit, <Solid state switch>
when the wiring is more than 30m long, it is not able to Although a zener diode for surge protection is connected to the
Fittings & Tubing

adequately absorb the rush current and its life may be output side of a solid state auto switch, damage may still occur if
reduced. It is again necessary to connect a contact protection the surge is applied repeatedly. When a load, such as a relay or
box in order to extend its life. Please contact SMC in this case. solenoid, which generates surge is directly driven, use a type of
<Solid state switch> switch with a built-in surge absorbing element.
3) Although wire length should not affect switch function, use a 8. Cautions for use in an interlock circuit
wire 100m or shorter. When an auto switch is used for an interlock signal requiring high
reliability, devise a double interlock system to avoid trouble by
Air preparation
5. Use caution to internal voltage drop of a switch.

equipment
<Reed switch> providing a mechanical protection function, or by also using

another switch (sensor) together with the auto switch.
1. Switches with an indicator light (except D-A56/A76H/ A96/A96
Also perform periodic maintenance inspections and confirm
V/C76/E76A/Z76)
proper operation.
· If auto switches are connected in series as shown below, please
note that there will be a large voltage drop because of internal 9. Ensure sufficient space for maintenance activities.
resistance in the light emitting diodes. (Refer to internal voltage When designing an application, be sure to allow sufficient space
Pressure switch
drop in the auto switch specifications.) for maintenance and inspection.

· [The voltage drop will be "n" times larger when "n" auto switches
are connected.]
The load may be ineffective even though the auto switch function
is normal.
Clean gas filter
Load
179
Mounting/Adjustment Wiring
Warning Warning
1. Do not drop or bump. 5. Do not allow short circuiting of loads.
Do not drop, bump, or apply excessive impacts (300m/s2 or more <Reed switch>
for reed switches and 1000m/s2 or more for solid state switches) If the power is turned on with a load in a short circuited condition,
while handling. Although the body of the switch may not be the switch will be instantly damaged because of excess current
damaged, the inside of the switch could be damaged and cause a flow into the switch.
malfunction. <Solid state switch>
Models M-F9첸(V), F9첸W(V), J51, G5NB and all models of PNP
2. Do not carry a cylinder by the auto switch lead wires.
output switches do not have built-in short circuit prevention
Never carry a cylinder by its lead wires. This may not only cause
circuits. If loads are short circuited, the switches will be instantly
broken lead wires, but it may cause internal elements of the
damaged.
switch to be damaged by the stress.
Use caution to avoid reverse wiring with the brown power supply
3. Mount switches using the proper tightening torque. line and the black output line on 3 -wire type switches.
When a switch is tightened beyond the range of tightening torque,
6. Avoid incorrect wiring.
the mounting screws or switch may be damaged.
<Reed switch>
On the other hand, tightening below the range of tightening
A 24VDC switch with indicator light has polarity. The brown lead
torque may allow the switch to slip out of position.
wire or terminal No.1 is (+), and the blue lead wire or terminal
4. Mount a switch at the center of the operating range. No.2 is (–).
Adjust the mounting position of an auto switch so that the piston [In the case of model D-97, the side without indicator is (+) and
stops at the center of the operating range (the range in which a the blue line side is (–).]
switch is ON). (The mounting positions shown in the catalog 1) If connections are reversed, a switch will operate, however, the
indicate the optimum position at the stroke end.) If mounted at the light emitting diode will not light up.
end of the operating range (around the borderline of ON and Also please note that a current greater than the maximum
OFF), the operation will be unstable. specified one will damage a light emitting diode and make it
<D-M9첸> inoperable.
If this auto switch replaces the conventional model, it may not Applicable models
function depending on the application (shown below) because its D-A73, A73H, A73C, C73, C73C, E73A, Z73, R73
operation range is shorter. D-97, 93A, A93, A93V
· Applications where at the end, the stopping position shifting D-A33, A34, A33A, A34A, A44, A44A
range is larger than the operation range D-A53, A54, B53, B54
e.g. Workpiece pushing, pressing into a hole, or clamping 2) However, when using a 2 color indication auto switch (D-
· Applications where an auto switch is used to detect A79W, A59W, B59W), be aware that the switch will constantly
intermediate stopping positions (Detecting time is remain ON if the connections are reversed.
shortened). <Solid state switch>
As indicated above, mount a switch at the center of the 1) If connections are reversed on a 2-wire type switch, the switch
operating range. will not be damaged if protected by a protection circuit, but the
switch will always stay in an ON state. However, it is still
necessary to avoid reversed connections, since the switch
could be damaged by a load short circuit in this condition.
Wiring 2) If connections are reversed (power supply line (+) and power
supply line (–) on a 3-wire type switch, the switch will be
Warning protected by a protection circuit. However, if the power supply
line (+) is connected to the blue wire and the power supply line
(–) is connected to the black wire, the switch will be damaged.
1. Avoid repeatedly bending or stretching lead wires.
Broken lead wires will result from repeatedly applying bending <D-M9첸>
stress or stretching force to lead wires. D-M9첸 does not have built-in short-circuit prevention circuits.
Reverse connection of power supply line (+) and (–) may damage
2. Be sure to connect the load before power is applied. the switch.
<2-wire type>
If the power is turned on when an auto switch is not connected to
a load, the switch will be instantly damaged because of excess
current.
3. Confirm proper insulation of wiring.
Be certain that there is no faulty wiring insulation (contact with
other circuits, ground fault, improper insulation between
terminals, etc.). Damage may occur due to excess current flow
into a switch.
4. Do not wire with power lines or high voltage lines.
Wire separately from power lines or high voltage lines, avoiding
parallel wiring or wiring in the same conduit with these lines.
Control circuits, including auto switches, may malfunction due to
180
Air cylinder
Environment Maintenance
Warning Warning
1. Never use in the presence of explosive gases. 1. Perform the following maintenance periodically in order to
Rotary actuator
Our auto switches are not explosion proof. Never use them in the prevent possible danger due to unexpected auto switch
presence of explosive gas, as this may cause a serious malfunction.
explosion. 1) Securely tighten switch mounting screws.
2. Do not use in an area where a magnetic field is generated. If screws become loose or the mounting position is dislocated,
Auto switches will malfunction or magnets inside cylinders will retighten screws securely after readjusting the mounting
become demagnetized. (Please consult with SMC regarding the position.
Air gripper
availability of a magnetic field resistant auto switch.) 2) Confirm that there is no damage to lead wires.
To prevent faulty insulation, replace switches or repair lead
3. Do not use in environments where the auto switches will
wires if damage is discovered.
be constantly exposed to water.
Although switches except D-A3첸/A44첸/G39첸/K39첸 satisfy the 3) Confirm that the green light on the 2-color indicator type switch
IEC standard IP67 structure (JIS C 0920: anti-immersion lights up.
Directional control
structure), do not use switches in applications where continually Confirm that the green LED is ON when stopped at the set
exposed to water splash or spray. Poor insulation or swelling of position. If the red LED is ON when stopped at the set position,
valve
the potting resin inside switches may cause malfunction. the mounting position is not appropriate. Readjust the
mounting position until the green LED lights up.
4. Do not use in environments with oil or chemicals.
Please consult with SMC if auto switches will be used in an
environment with coolants, cleaning solvents, various oils or Other
chemicals. If auto switches are used under these conditions for
Warning
Flow control
equipment
even a short time, they may be adversely affected by improper
insulation, a malfunction due to swelling of the potting resin, or 1. Please consult with SMC concerning water resistance,
hardening of the lead wires. elasticity of lead wires, etc.
5. Do not use in environments with temperature cycles. ∗Lead wire color changes
Please consult with SMC if switches are to be used where there Lead wire colors of SMC auto switches have been changed in order to meet NECA (Nippon
control equipment
Electric Control Equipment Industries Association) Standard 0402 for production beginning
are temperature cycles other than normal temperature changes,
Filter, Pressure
September, 1996 and thereafter.Special care should be taken regarding wire polarity
as they may be adversely affected internally. during the time that both old and new colors exist.
2-wire system 3-wire system

6. Do not use in environments where there is excessive impact
Old New Old New
shock.
Output (+) Red Brown Power supply + Red Brown
<Reed switch>
2 Output (–) Black Blue Power supply GND Black Blue
When excessive impact (300 m/s or more) is applied to a reed
Fittings & Tubing

switch during operation, the contact point may malfunction and Output White Black
generate or cut off a signal momentarily (1ms or less). Please Solid state with diagnostic output Solid state with latch type diagnostic output
consult with SMC regarding the need to use a solid state switch Old New Old New
depending on the environment. Power supply + Red Brown Power supply + Red Brown
7. Do not use in locations where surges are generated. Power supply GND Black Blue Power supply GND Black Blue
<Solid state switch> Output White Black Output White Black

Air preparation
When there are units (solenoid type lifters, high frequency Diagnostic output Yellow Orange Latch type diagnostic output Yellow Orange
equipment
induction furnaces, motors, etc.) which generate a large amount

of surge in the area around cylinders with solid state auto
switches, this may cause deterioration or damage to the switches. Caution
Avoid sources of surge generation and crossed lines. 1. When stripping the cable clad, take care with the orientation
of the cable being stripped. The insulator may accidentally be
8. Avoid close contact with magnetic substances.
torn or damaged depending on the orientation.(D-M9첸 only)
Pressure switch
When a magnetic substance (substance attracted by a magnet) is

brought into close proximity with an auto switch cylinder, it may
cause the auto switches to malfunction due to a loss of the
magnetic force inside the cylinder.
Clean gas filter
Recommended tools are shown below.

Manufacturer Model name Model no.
VESSEL Wire stripper No 3000G
TOKYO IDEAL Strip master 45-089
∗ Stripper for round cable (ø2.0) can be used for a 2-wire type cable.
181
Cylinder
Applicable auto switch list
CDBM2
CDQSX
CDM2X
CDQ2X
CDQS
CDM2
CDG1
CDQ2
CDA2
CXSJ
CDJ2
MGP
MXQ
ø40/ø63/ø100 MGF
Cylinder series
CDU
MXP
MXS
REC
CXS
CYP
CUJ
ø32 to ø100
ø20 to ø40
ø20 to ø40
ø20 to ø63
ø40 to ø63
ø12 to ø25
ø20 to ø40
ø12 to ø63
ø12 to ø25
ø32 to ø63
ø20 to ø40
ø80/ø100
ø6 to ø10
ø6 to ø25
ø6 to ø32
ø6 to ø16
ø6 to ø25
ø6 to ø25
ø10/ø16
ø15/ø32
Bore size
ø6·ø10
ø6
D-C7/C8
D-C73C/C80C
D-B5/B6
D-B59W
D-A3/A4
D-A3첸A/A44A
Reed switch
D-A3첸C/A44C
D-A7/A8
D-A7첸H/A80H
D-A73C/A80C
D-A79W
D-A5/A6
D-A59W
D-A9 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
D-A9첸V ∗ ∗
D-Z7/Z8
D-H7
D-H7C
D-H7BAL
D-H7첸F
D-H7첸W
D-G5/K5
D-G5BAL
D-G59F
D-G5NTL
D-G5첸W/K59W
D-G39/K39
D-G39A/K39A
D-F7/J7
D-J79C
D-F7첸F
D-F7BAL
D-F7BAVL
D-F7첸V
Solid state switch
D-F7NTL
D-F7첸W (V)
D-F5/J5
D-F5BAL
D-F5첸W/J59W
D-F5첸F
D-F5NTL
D-G39C/K39C
D-M9 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
D-M9첸V ∗ ∗
D-F9첸W ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
D-F9첸WV ∗ ∗
D-F9BAL ∗ ∗
D-Y59A/Y7P/Y59B
D-Y69A/Y7PV/Y69B
D-Y7첸W
D-Y7첸WV
D-Y7BAL
D-P5첸WL
D-F9G/H ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
D-Y7G/H
D-G5NBL
D-F8첸
Please refer to the next page for applicable auto switches and cylinders in the fields marked with asterisks (∗).
182
Compact auto switch mounting bracket
Mounting brackets used for installing the compact auto switches D-A9/M9/F9 onto band mounting / tie-rod mounting /
groove mounting style cylinders are available.
Air cylinder
Mounting
Band mounting bracket
Applicable auto switch
Rotary actuator
Solid state switch
D-M9
D-F9첸W (2-color indication)
Applicable cylinder Reed switch

D-A9
10-/11-/21-/22-CDJ2 Series
Air gripper
10-/11-/21-/22-CDM2 Series
10-/11-/21-/22-CDG1 Series
10-/11-REC Series Perpendicular entry is unavailable.
10-/11-CDM2X Series
Directional control
Tie-rod mounting
valve
Flow control
equipment
Mounting
bracket
Applicable cylinder
10-/11-/21-/22-CDA2 Series
Applicable auto switch
control equipment
Filter, Pressure
Solid state switch
D-M9/M9첸V
D-F9첸W/F9첸WV (2-color indication)
D-F9BAL (water resistant type)
Fittings & Tubing

Groove mounting
Reed switch
D-A9/D-A9첸V
Mounting
bracket Air preparation
equipment
Applicable cylinder
12-/13-/21-/22-MGP Series
Pressure switch
Clean gas filter
183
Safety Instructions
These safety instructions are intended to prevent hazardous situations and/or equipment damage.
These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard with the labels of “Caution,” “Warning” or
“Danger.” They are all important notes for safety and must be followed in addition to International
Standards (ISO/IEC), Japan Industrial Standards (JIS)∗1) and other safety regulations∗2).
∗ 1) ISO 4414: Pneumatic fluid power – General rules relating to systems.
ISO 4413: Hydraulic fluid power – General rules relating to systems.
IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines. (Part 1: General requirements)
ISO 10218-1992: Manipulating industrial robots -Safety.
JIS B 8370: General rules for pneumatic equipment.
JIS B 8361: General rules for hydraulic equipment.
JIS B 9960-1: Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines. (Part 1: General requirements)
JIS B 8433-1993: Manipulating industrial robots - Safety.
etc.
∗ 2) Labor Safety and Sanitation Law, etc.
Caution: Operator error could result in injury or equipment damage.

Warning: Operator error could result in serious injury or loss of life.
Danger : In extreme conditions, there is a possibility of serious injury or loss of life.
Warning
1. The compatibility of the product is the responsibility of the person who designs the equipment
or decides its specifications.
Since the product specified here is used under various operating conditions, its compatibility with specific equipment must be
decided by the person who designs the equipment or decides its specifications based on necessary analysis and test results.
The expected performance and safety assurance of the equipment will be the responsibility of the person who has determined
its compatibility with the product. This person should also continuously review all specifications of the product referring to its
latest catalog information, with a view to giving due consideration to any possibility of equipment failure when configuring the
equipment.
2. Only personnel with appropriate training should operate machinery and equipment.
The product specified here may become unsafe if handled incorrectly. The assembly, operation and maintenance of machines or
equipment including our products must be performed by an operator who is appropriately trained and experienced.
3. Do not service or attempt to remove product and machinery/equipment until safety is confirmed.
1. The inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed after measures to prevent falling or
runaway of the driven objects have been confirmed.
2. When the product is to be removed, confirm that the safety measures as mentioned above are implemented and the power
from any appropriate source is cut, and read and understand the specific product precautions of all relevant products
carefully.
3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent unexpected operation and malfunction.
4. Contact SMC beforehand and take special consideration of safety measures if the product is to
be used in any of the following conditions.
1. Conditions and environments outside of the given specifications, or use outdoors or in a place exposed to direct sunlight.
2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railways, air navigation, space, shipping, vehicles, military,
medical treatment, combustion and recreation, or equipment in contact with food and beverages, emergency stop circuits,
clutch and brake circuits in press applications, safety equipment or other applications unsuitable for the standard
specifications described in the product catalog.
3. An application which could have negative effects on people, property, or animals requiring special safety analysis.
4. Use in an interlock circuit, which requires the provision of double interlock for possible failure by using a mechanical protective
function, and periodical checks to confirm proper operation.
Back matter 1
Safety Instructions
Caution
The product is provided for use in manufacturing industries.
The product herein described is basically provided for peaceful use in manufacturing industries.
If considering using the product in other industries, consult SMC beforehand and exchange specifications or a contract
if necessary. If anything is unclear, contact your nearest sales branch.
Limited Warranty and Disclaimer/Compliance Requirements

The product used is subject to the following “Limited Warranty and Disclaimer” and “Compliance
Requirements”. Read and accept them before using the product.
Limited Warranty and Disclaimer

1. The warranty period of the product is 1 year in service or 1.5 years after the product is deliv-
ered.∗3)
Also, the product may have specified durability, running distance or replacement parts. Please
consult your nearest sales branch.
2. For any failure or damage reported within the warranty period which is clearly our responsibility,
a replacement product or necessary parts will be provided.
This limited warranty applies only to our product independently, and not to any other damage
incurred due to the failure of the product.
3. Prior to using SMC products, please read and understand the warranty terms and disclaimers
noted in the specified catalog for the particular products.
∗ 3) Vacuum pads are excluded from this 1 year warranty.
A vacuum pad is a consumable part, so it is warranted for a year after it is delivered.
Also, even within the warranty period, the wear of a product due to the use of the vacuum pad or failure due to the
deterioration of rubber material are not covered by the limited warranty.
Compliance Requirements
When the product is exported, strictly follow the laws required by the Ministry of Economy, Trade
and Industry (Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law).
Back matter 2
Clean series: Common Precautions 1
Refer to the main text for detailed precautions on every series.
Air Supply
Caution
System Configuration
Refer to the "Air Preparation System" below for the quality of compressed air before configuring the system.
Main line Sub-line
Aftercooler
(Air cooled)
Series HAA
Reciprocating air compressor
Aftercooler (Water cooled) Air tank Main line filter

Series HAW Series AT Series AFF
Aftercooler
(Air cooled)
Screw air compressor Series HAA
Aftercooler (Water cooled)

Series HAW
Piping 7. If air with a low dew point (–40°C or less) is required, do not use
1. Provide an inclination of 1cm per meter in the direction of the air nylon tube or resin fitting (except for fluorine resin) for the outlet
flow to the main piping. side of the membrane air dryer or heatless air dryer. Nylon tubing
2. If there is a line branching from the main piping, provide an outlet of could be affected by the ambient air and it thus might not be
compressed air on top using a tee so that drainage accumulated in possible to achieve the prescribed low dew point at the end of the
the piping will not flow out. tube. Therefore, for low dew point air, use stainless steel or fluorine
3. Provide a drainage mechanism at every recessed point or dead end tube.
to prevent drain accumulation. Maintenance
4. For future piping extensions, plug the end of the piping with a tee. 1. If the heatless air dryer Series ID is left unused for a long period,
5. Before piping the absorbent may be moistened. Prior to use, close the valve on
Before piping, the piping should be thoroughly blown out with air the outlet side of the dryer for regeneration and drying.
(flushed) or washed to remove chips, cutting oil and other debris Caution on Design
from inside the pipe. Employ a safe design, so that the following unexpected conditions will
6. Wrapping of pipe tape not occur.
When screwing piping or fittings into ports, ensure that chips from
the pipe threads or sealing material do not get inside the valve. Warning
Also, when pipe tape is used, leave 1.5 to 2 thread ridges exposed 1. Provide a design that prevents high-temperature compressed
at the end of the threads. air from flowing into the outlet side of the cooling equipment.
If the flow of the coolant water in a water-cooled aftercooler is
stopped or if the fan motor of an air cooled aftercooler is stopped,
Winding the high-temperature compressed air will flow to the outlet side of
direction
the cooling equipment, causing the equipment on the outlet side
Ex (such as the AFF, AM, AD, or IDF series) to be damaged or to
po
se Pipe tape
ap
pr malfunction.
ox
.2
thr 2. Provide a design in which interruptions in the supply of
ea
ds compressed air are taken into consideration.
Back matter 3
Air Supply
Local line
<For driving actuators>
Series AM Series AMD IDG첸, IDG첸H Contaminants in compressed air

Moisture Solid Oil mist concentration Odor
(Pressurized 0.3 µm Series
0.01mg/m3 Little oil AME
dew point) 100 particles/ft3
(ANR) odor
10°C or less
Series AMH
Refrigerated air dryer
Air tank
Series IDF
Series AT <For blowing>
Series AME Series SF

Refrigerated air dryer Series ID +
Series AMF
Series IDF
IDG첸L, IDG첸S
Refrigerated air dryer Contaminants in compressed air

Series IDU Moisture Solid Oil mist concentration Odor
Atmospheric 0.01 µm
pressure dew 1 particle/ft3 0.004mg/m3 No oil
point – 50°C or less (ANR) odor
or less
There are cases in which compressed air cannot flow due to the equipment damage.
freezing of the refrigerated air dryer or a malfunction (heatless Take appropriate safety measures, including the proper installation
dryer) in the switching valve. methods.
5. Depending on the model and operating conditions, the life
Caution span of air cylinders may be shortened when they are used in
3. Design a layout in which the leakage of the coolant water and an environment of super dry air (atmospheric pressure dew
the dripping of condensation are taken into consideration. point: –50°C) or high-purity nitrogen gas or when such super
A water-cooled aftercooler that uses coolant water could lead to dry air or high-purity nitrogen gas is used as the fluid.
water leakage due to freezing. Depending on the operating Please contact with SMC for further details on applicable series,
conditions, the refrigerated air dryer and its downstream pipes models, operating conditions and life spans.
could create a dripping of water droplets due to condensation 6. Blowing system
formed by supercooling. Even a small amount of dust can be a problem for blowing
4. Provide a design that prevents back pressure and backflow. systems.
The generation of back pressure and backflow could lead to Install Clean Gas Filter Series SF to the end of the blowing line.
Back matter 4
Refer to the main text for detailed precautions on every series.
Piping: Inside of Clean Room
Caution
1. Do not make the piping for the air cylinder relief port and 4. Arrange the membrane dryer air purge piping using a standard
regulator breathing vent piping common with solenoid valve size tubing so that air is exhausted outside the clean room.
exhaust piping.
This can cause malfunctions in the air cylinder or regulator 5. Take precautions so that the threaded portion of the piping
pressure change. connection or the tubing connection will not be loosened.
Take sufficient precautions against the piping shaking along with
2. Arrange the piping so that the exhaust air of the solenoid the vibration of the equipment.
valves is exhausted outside of the clean room.
6. Use polyurethane tubing containing no plasticizer.
3. Air filter drain piping
Exhaust drainage outside the clean room through piping from the
drain guide of the air filter.
Inside clean room
Relief port piping Solenoid valve Breathing Purge air piping Drain piping
exhaust piping vent piping of for membrane
regulator air dryer
Handling Lubrication / In the Case of Actuator
Caution Warning
1. The inner bag of a double-packed clean series package should Be sure to wash your hands after handling fluororesin grease.
be opened in a clean room or clean environment. The grease itself is not hazardous but it can produce a hazardous gas
at temperatures exceeding 260°C.
2. When standard pneumatic equipment is brought into a clean
room, spray high-purity air upon it and remove dust
thoroughly by wiping the external surfaces of the cylinder Caution
tube, solenoid valves and air line equipment with alcohol. 1. Do not use any greases but those specified by SMC.
Use of greases not specified will cause malfunctions or
3. To replace parts or disassemble the product in a clean room, particle generation.
first exhaust the compressed air inside the piping to the
outside of the clean room before the work. 2. Do not lubricate the products since they are of a nonlubricant
type.
4. Do not use rotation type mounting brackets such as clevises, As the clean series actuators are lubricated at the factory with
trunnions, etc.. They will generate a considerable amount of fluororesin grease, the product specifications may not be satisfied if
particulate matter due to the sliding friction between the metal turbine oil or other such lubricants are applied.
parts.
Piston speed
Caution
The cylinder speed upper limit that retains the particle
generation grade is 400 mm/s.
Back matter 5
Refer to the main text for detailed precautions for every series.
Suction flow rate of vacuum suction types
Caution
For the vacuum suction types (Series 11-/13-/22-),
perform vacuum suction at the vacuum port to retain the
particle generation grade.
The optimum suction flow rate varies depending on series
and sizes. Refer to "Suction flow rate of vacuum suction type
(Reference values)" for each series. (The vacuum pressure
will be approximately -27 kPa at around 1 m from the
vacuum suction port.) Please consult SMC for further details.
Location where vacuum
pressure is measured
Piping length (m) Vacuum source
Adjust the measured vacuum pressure using a

regulator to be the value in the graphs below.
0
11-CJ2
-0.027 -0.001
11-CM2 13-MXS16
Vacuum pressure (MPa)
Vacuum pressure (MPa)
-0.002
11-CQ -0.003
-0.028
-0.004
13-MJP -0.005
-0.029 13-MXS20
11-CU -0.006
-0.007
-0.030 -0.008
-0.009
-0.031 13-MXS25
-0.010
11-CXS
-0.011
-0.032 -0.012
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Piping length (m) Piping length (m)
Back matter 6
Akihabara UDX 15F,
4-14-1, Sotokanda, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 101-0021, JAPAN
Phone: 03-5207-8249 FAX: 03-5298-5362
URL http://www.smcworld.com
© 2008 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice D-SZ 1st printing MT printing MT 16400SZ Printed in Japan.
and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer.

CM2B25 PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

CM2B25 PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Air Cylinder

Series CM2 rod

With End Lock 32

XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin

Electrical Wiring Auto switch Pre-wired

Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 None connector Applicable load

conduit 2-wire 24V 12V — K39A ∗∗ —

100V or less A90 IC circuit

100V, 200V B54 ∗∗ Relay,

100V, 200V — Relay,

Can be used for either nylon, soft nylon or

앫 For construction, refer to page 134.

Standard port Relief port

For details, refer to the separate catalog, “Pneumatic Clean Series”.

CM2 X Mounting style Bore size Stroke Specifications

Ambient and fluid temperature

Cushion Rubber bumper

Boss-cut style Clevis integrated style

With air cushion

Built-in One-touch fittings

With Rod Boot (mm)

With rod boot 8 l 8

With air cushion WA WA 45°

Built-in One-touch fittings G One-touch fitting port size øP G

With Rod Boot (mm)

With Rod Boot (mm)

Width MM AL Width across flats 쏔NA N FX

G One-touch fitting port size øP G

(mm) With Air Cushion (mm) Built-in One-touch Fittings (mm)

With Rod Boot (mm)

With Rod Boot (mm)

Width across flats B1 H1 NN G G

Width across flats KA A K F N N U NA CJP

Built-in One-touch fittings G One-touch fitting port size øP G

With Rod Boot (mm)

With rod boot 8 l 8

Built-in One-touch fittings G One-touch fitting port size øP G

G One-touch fitting port size øP G

(mm) With Rod Boot (mm)

MM AL Width across flats 쏔NA TX

Built-in One-touch fittings G One-touch fitting port size øP G

(mm) With Rod Boot (mm)

With Rod Boot (mm)

With Air Cushion (mm) Built-in One-touch Fittings (mm)

(mm) With Rod Boot (mm)

Double Knuckle Joint (mm)

Bore size A H L MM ND NX2 R2 U2 Y Z

Double Knuckle Joint (mm)

Y-020B/Y-032B Material: Rolled steel Y-040B Material: Cast iron

øND hole H10

Rod Side Trunnion Head Side Trunnion

ø6.8 20.5 6.8 x 3.4 ø6.8 20.5

Pivot Bracket Pivot Bracket Pin (For CM2C)

øCD +0.15 øCD +0.15

Electrical Wiring Auto switch Pre-wired

Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 None connector Applicable load

conduit 2-wire 24V 12V — K39A ∗∗ —

100V or less A90 IC circuit

100V, 200V B54 ∗∗ Relay,

100V, 200V — Relay,

Accessory Bracket Rod Boot Material

Single knuckle Double knuckle

Specifications Specifications CG1